JP2012105856A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine in which performance indicating a possibility of a specific display result has which saved memory as its target is understandable and which enhances interest in a game.SOLUTION: When a game is shifted to a jackpot game state, display modes of saved memory display corresponding to respective saved memories are changed to execute saved memory performance indicating possibilities that display results of variable display based on the respective saved memories become specific display results for each saved memory ((B) to (J)). After the saved memory performance is executed in a first period, such as the first to eighth rounds ((B) to (J)), regarding saved memory information whose display mode has not changed in the saved memory performance at least in the first period, saved memory performance as recovery suspension is executed again ((K) to (M)) only in the ninth round or in a second period, such as the ninth to sixteenth rounds.

Description

  The present invention includes a variable display means for performing variable display of a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified in accordance with the establishment of the starting condition, and the display result of the identification information derived to the variable display means is predetermined. The present invention relates to a gaming machine that shifts to a specific gaming state advantageous to a player when a specific display result is obtained.

  As generally known as this type of gaming machine, for example, as in a pachinko gaming machine, each can be identified in accordance with the establishment of a starting condition (a game ball has won a start winning opening) A variable display means for performing variable display of a plurality of types of identification information (symbols) is provided, and when the display result of the identification information derived to the variable display means is a predetermined specific display result (a jackpot display result) In some cases, the game is shifted to a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player.

  As such a gaming machine, there is one that performs a notice display of a notice about the display result of the variable display based on the data stored on hold in the big hit gaming state (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2005-027750 (paragraph numbers 0080 to 0086, FIG. 3)

  However, in the conventional gaming machine that displays the effect of the advance notice during the big hit based on the data stored in the big hit gaming state as disclosed in Patent Document 1, the reserved storage is targeted for which of the reserved memories. It is difficult to understand what is displayed, and it is difficult to know what change display can be expected for the target based on the effect of the notice, so there is a risk that the effect of the notice will be reduced and the interest of the game will be reduced .

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and its purpose is to make it easy to understand which reserved memory is intended for an effect that suggests the possibility of a specific display result, and it is an entertainment interest of the game. It is providing the game machine which can improve.

Specific examples of means for solving the problems and their effects

(1) Fluctuation display means (effect display device 9, first special symbol display device 8a) for performing a variable display of a plurality of types of identification information (symbols) that can be identified according to the establishment of the start condition (start prize) A special game that has a second special symbol display device 8b) and is advantageous to the player when the display result of the identification information derived to the variable display means becomes a predetermined specific display result (a jackpot display result) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) to be shifted to a state (big hit gaming state),
Reservation storage means (RAM 55, the first reservation storage buffer and the second reservation storage buffer in FIG. 13B) for storing the data extracted when the start condition is satisfied as the storage,
Predetermining means (game controlling microcomputer 560, S60, S71 in FIG. 20) for determining whether or not the display result is the specific display result when starting the variable display of the identification information based on the holding storage. To S73),
Whether the display result of the variable display based on the one hold memory becomes the specific display result until the specific condition for starting the variable display based on the one hold memory stored in the hold storage means is satisfied. Holding memory judging means (game control microcomputer 560, S216, S226 in FIG. 12, S231-S235 in FIG. 15) for judging
Hold display means (effect display device 9, combined hold storage display unit 18c) for performing hold storage display corresponding to each hold storage in a manner in which the number of the hold memories stored in the hold storage means can be visually recognized;
Based on the determination result of the hold memory determining means (S725 in FIG. 49), the display mode of the hold memory display corresponding to each hold memory is changed to thereby change each hold memory stored in the hold memory means. Suggestion effects that suggest the possibility that the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result for each hold memory (the hold storage effects in FIGS. 9 and 54, the hold memory display as in FIGS. 34, 35, and 55) Suggestion effect means (a microcomputer 100 for effect control, S908A, S909, S911, S912 in FIG. 45, S1978A, S1979, S1981, S1982 in FIG. 48). S720 to S736 in FIG. 49, S751 to S761 in FIG. 50, and S771 to S786 in FIG.
The suggestion producing means is
In the first period (the first to eighth rounds in FIG. 32 and the first to eighth rounds in FIG. 53), the holding storage stored in the holding storage unit based on the determination result of the holding storage determination unit First suggestion effect execution means for executing the suggestion effect (microcomputer 100 for effect control, S908A, S909, S911, S912 in FIG. 45, S1978A, S1979, S1981, S1982 in FIG. 48, S720-S736 in FIG. 49) , S751 to S761 in FIG. 50, S771 to 780 in FIG. 57),
In the second period after the first period has elapsed (the ninth round in FIG. 32, the ninth to the sixteenth rounds in FIG. 53), at least the first suggestion among the respective storages stored in the storage unit. Reservation memory in which the display mode of the on-hold storage display did not change due to the suggestion effect by the effect execution means (the right that no effect was selected, the right that the storage time was later than the effect mode selection target of the hold storage information) ) On the basis of the determination result of the on-hold storage determination means, the second suggestion effect execution means (execution control microcomputer 100, S1978A, S1979, S1981, S1982 in FIG. 48, FIG. S720 to S726, S740 to S747, and S771 to S776 and S781 to 785 in FIG. 57).

  According to such a configuration, by changing the display mode of the hold memory display corresponding to each hold memory, it is suggested for each hold memory that the display result of the variable display based on each hold memory may become the specific display result. By performing the suggestion effect to be performed, it becomes easy to understand which reserved memory the suggestion effect is intended for, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, after the suggestion effect on the hold memory is executed in the first period, the display mode of the hold memory display is changed by the suggestion effect in at least the first period of the hold memory in the second period after the first period. Since the suggestion effect is executed again for the reserved memory that has not been received, the player can have a sense of expectation even for the reserved memory whose display mode has not changed during the first period. Can be improved.

  (2) In the gaming machine of (1), the second suggestion effect executing means stores the hold memory in which the suggestion effect is not executed by the first suggestion effect executing means, and the hold memory in which the suggestion effect is executed. The suggestion effect is executed again with priority over (S740 and S742 in FIG. 49).

  According to such a configuration, since the suggestion effect is executed again in preference to the hold memory in which the suggestion effect is executed for the hold memory in which the suggestion effect is not executed by the suggestion effect in the first period, It is possible to prevent the display mode from changing due to the suggestion effect for only a part of the reserved memory.

  (3) In the gaming machines of (1) and (2), the suggestion effect means executes the suggestion effect in the specific game state, and is stored in the hold storage means before shifting to the specific game state. In addition to the reserved memory, the suggestion effect is executed for the reserved memory stored in the reserved memory means during the specific gaming state (S725 in FIG. 49 and S773 in FIG. 57 for each round). The pre-reading of the hold determination data is performed, and the hold storage effect is executed).

  According to such a configuration, in addition to the on-hold storage stored in the on-hold storage means before shifting to the specific gaming state, the suggestion effect is also targeted on the on-hold storage stored in the on-hold storage means during the specific gaming state. Since it is executed, the target range of the suggestion effect is expanded, so that the interest of the game can be further improved.

(4) In the gaming machines of (1) to (3), the first state (open state) in which a game medium (game ball) can be won, and the game medium is less likely to win or wins than the first state. A variable winning device (special variable winning ball device 20) that is changeable to a second state (closed state) that is not controlled and is controlled to the first state when controlled to the specific gaming state;
As the specific gaming state, the variable prize apparatus is changed from the second state to the first state until a predetermined round control period elapses or until an end condition is satisfied before the round control period elapses. Specific game state control means (game) capable of executing round control by repeatedly executing a unit round (29-second open round, 0.5-second open round) multiple times (9 rounds, 2 rounds, 16 rounds) A control microcomputer 560, S305 and S306 in FIG. 11, S401 to S407 in FIG. 25, and S420 to S444 in FIG.
The suggestion effect means can perform the suggestion effect for the reserved memory associated in advance in each round in the specific gaming state (FIGS. 32 and 53).
The suggestion effect means, in each round in the specific gaming state, when there is no reserved memory as a target to perform the suggestion effect (when there is no number of reserved memories corresponding to the number of rounds) It further includes reserved memory number effect limiting means (S727 in FIG. 49, S774 in FIG. 57) for limiting the execution of the suggestion effect.

  According to such a configuration, in each round in the specific gaming state, the suggestion effect is performed for the reserved memory associated in advance, and in each round in the specific gaming state, the reservation memory for performing the suggestion effect is stored. Since the execution of the suggestion effect in the round is restricted when it does not exist, the relationship between the suggestion effect and the reserved memory becomes easy to understand, and further, the interest of the suggestion effect does not decrease, thereby further enhancing the interest of the game Can be made.

  (5) In the gaming machines of (1) to (4), the suggestion effect means is the reserved memory in which the effect mode of the hold memory display is changed in the suggestion effect executed by the first suggestion effect execution means. , Further includes already-executed effect restricting means (S740, S745 in FIG. 49, S781 in FIG. 57) for restricting execution of the suggestive effect by the second suggestive effect executing means.

  According to such a configuration, the execution of the suggestion effect by the second suggestion effect execution unit is restricted for the hold memory in which the effect mode of the hold memory display is changed in the suggestion effect executed by the first suggestion effect execution unit. In addition, with respect to the hold memory in which the effect mode of the hold memory display is changed by the suggestion effect executed by the first suggestion effect executing means, the suggestion effect is executed by the execution of the suggestion effect by the second suggestion effect executing means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being awakened by such an effect and deteriorating the interest of the game.

(6) In the gaming machine according to (1) to (5), the gaming machine further includes operation means (operation button 130) operable by the player,
The suggestion effect means performs the suggestion effect when the operation by the operation means satisfies a predetermined operation condition (when operated within a predetermined period) (S1904A in FIGS. 9, 54, and 46).

  According to such a configuration, since the suggestion effect is performed when the operation by the operation means satisfies a predetermined operation condition, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved and the interest of the game can be improved.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a figure explaining the feature of control of big hit type in a table form. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the circuit structure in a main board | substrate. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a relay board | substrate, an effect control board | substrate, a lamp driver board | substrate, and an audio | voice output board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for game control in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit determination table and the big hit classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in direction devices, such as an effect display apparatus, when a holding memory effect is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the presentation control command which the microcomputer for game control transmits. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the pending | holding storage buffer in the microcomputer for game control. It is a figure which shows the structure of the holding | maintenance determination data storage area provided in the production control microcomputer side, and the example of holding | maintenance memory | production control using the information of a holding | maintenance determination data storage area in a table | surface form. It is a flowchart which shows the effect process at the time of winning. It is explanatory drawing which shows the 1st determination table at the time of non-time-short state deviation, and the 2nd determination table at the time of non-time-short state deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the 1st determination table at the time-short state deviation, and the 2nd determination table at the time-short state deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows a non-short-time state probable big hit determination table and a short-time state probable big hit determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a non-short-time state sudden hit big hit judgment table and a short-time state sudden hit big hit judgment table. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is explanatory drawing which shows a normal symbol display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the random number which the microcomputer for production control uses. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the stop symbol of the effect design (decoration design) in an effect display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the effect (round effect) scheduled to be performed in each round of the 1st-9th round in a big hit game state in a table format. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production period determination table used when determining the production period corresponding to each holding | maintenance determination data at the time of performing a storage storage production. It is explanatory drawing which shows a 1R period holding | maintenance memory | storage effect aspect determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a 2R period holding | maintenance memory | storage effect aspect determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the resurrection effect aspect determination table used in order to select and determine the reservation memory effect aspect of the reservation color effect in a resurrection effect. It is a figure which shows the example of a change of the production | presentation aspect of a reservation memory image when a revival production is performed. It is a flowchart which shows production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a process table. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit display process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a round. It is a flowchart which shows the operation effect process. It is a flowchart which shows a round post-process. It is a flowchart which shows notice determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows holding memory production period selection processing. It is a flowchart which shows a pending | holding memory | storage display control process. It is a figure explaining the characteristic of control of the big hit classification by 2nd Embodiment in a table format. It is a figure which shows the effect (round effect) scheduled to be performed in each round of the 1st-16th round in the jackpot game state by 2nd Embodiment in a table | surface form. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation with production | presentation apparatuses, such as a production | presentation display apparatus, when the holding | maintenance memory | storage production | presentation by 2nd Embodiment is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hold memory production | presentation mode determination table used in order to select and determine the reservation memory production | presentation aspect at the time of performing the hold memory production by 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a change of the production | generation aspect of a hold memory image when the 1st time and the 2nd hold memory production are performed by 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the notice determination process by 2nd Embodiment.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. A pachinko gaming machine is shown as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and may be another gaming machine such as a coin gaming machine, and each is identified according to the establishment of a start condition. It is provided with a variable display means for performing variable display of a plurality of types of identification information, and is advantageous for the player when the display result of the identification information derived to the variable display means is a predetermined specific display result. Any gaming machine may be used as long as the gaming machine is shifted to the specific gaming state.

[First Embodiment]
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining the features of the jackpot type control in a table format.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) installed to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Below the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are an extra ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls as game media that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for emitting hitting balls (game balls). Is provided. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down. A large number of nails for guiding a game ball are implanted in the game area 7.

  An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. The effect display device 9 performs a change display (also referred to as a variable display, an update display, or a cyclic display) of the effect symbols (decorative symbols) in synchronization with the change display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The variation display of the effect symbol is executed in various variations such as scroll display and on-site switching display. The effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols (decorative symbols) as a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each. In the effect display device 9, an effect symbol display area for displaying an effect symbol on the display screen is provided. In the effect symbol display area, for example, three (plural) of “left”, “middle”, and “right” are provided. There is a symbol display area as a display area for variably displaying the effect symbols. Each of these three effect symbols is an effect symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display. When the variation display of the second special symbol is being executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device along with the variation display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

  On the left side of the upper portion of the effect display device 9 in the game board 6, there is a first special symbol display (first variation display means) 8a that variably displays a first special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified. Is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display device 8a is realized by a simple and small display device (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. In other words, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. On the right side of the upper portion of the effect display device 9 in the game board 6, there is a second special symbol display (second variation display means) 8b for variably displaying the second special symbols as a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified. Is provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. In other words, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display, for example, a number (or a two-digit symbol) of 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator. The first special symbol is subjected to variable display on the condition that the second special symbol display unit 8b does not execute the variable display of the second special symbol. The second special symbol is displayed on the condition that the first special symbol display unit 8a does not execute the variable display of the first special symbol. That is, either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed without being variably displayed at the same time.

  For the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the execution condition of the variation display, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening) 14), the display condition of the variable display (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0, and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) The game is started based on the fact that the big hit game is not executed), and when the variable display time (variable time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that winning means that a game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a winning opening (a game ball has entered). Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  In the following description, the fact that the game ball has won the first start prize opening 13 may be referred to as a first start prize, and the fact that the game ball has won the second start prize opening 14 will be referred to as a second start prize. There is a case. The data related to the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is held and stored as reserved storage data that is a right to perform variable display of the special symbol until the start condition is satisfied. Specifically, the on-hold storage data is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 55 of the game control microcomputer 560 described later. On-hold storage data for the first start prize is stored in the first on-hold storage buffer as first on-hold storage data with a predetermined number (for example, 4) as an upper limit, and on-premise storage data for the second start prize is stored in a predetermined number (for example, 4). Is stored in the second reserved storage buffer as second reserved storage data.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a ball striking device for driving a driving motor in response to the player operating the ball striking operation handle 5, and using the rotational force of the driving motor to launch the game ball to the game area 7 (see FIG. Not shown). A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning port 13 and is detected by the first start port switch 13a, if the variation display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends, 1), the first special symbol display unit 8a starts the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts the variable display of the effect symbol (decorative symbol). Is done. That is, the change display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning port 14 and is detected by the second start port switch 14a, if the variation display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends, 2), the second special symbol display unit 8b starts the variation display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts the variation display of the effect symbol (decoration symbol). Is done. That is, the change display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (effect) during the variable display time of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b. The effect design (decoration design) is displayed as a variation design. The change display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the change display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variation display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Synchronous means that the start point and end point of variable display are substantially the same (may be exactly the same) and the period of variable display is substantially the same (may be exactly the same). Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 reminds the jackpot The combination of is stopped and displayed. The first special symbol display device 8a, the second special symbol display device 8b, and the effect display device 9 described above are variable display devices that perform variable display of identification information and derive and display a display result, and are used as a variable display unit. It is done.

  In the effect display device 9, when starting the variable display, for example, all of the left, middle, and right effect symbols start the variable display. Then, the left, middle, and right effect symbols that are variably displayed basically stop in a predetermined order (for example, a predetermined order such as the order of the left effect symbol, the right effect symbol, and the middle effect symbol). When a predetermined variation time has elapsed from the start of variation display, all the left, middle and right effect symbols are stopped and the display result is confirmed. The order in which the left, middle, and right effect symbols stop may be other than the order of the left, right, and center symbols. Further, the left, middle, and right effect symbols may be stopped simultaneously.

  A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below the effect display device 9. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  A variable winning ball device (electric tulip) having a second starting winning port 14 (second starting port) through which a game ball can win is located below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 13. ) 15 is provided. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be awarded to the second starting winning port 14 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 than the first starting winning opening 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 14. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured that the winning is possible (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win) although it is difficult to win a prize. Thus, the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state may be a state in which the game ball is difficult to win or does not win the second start winning port 14.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 15 is very likely to win the second start winning port 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly under the effect display device 9, but the interval between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first start winning opening 13 is further reduced, or the first start winning opening is set. The nail arrangement around the first start winning opening 13 is made difficult to guide the game balls to the first starting winning opening 13 so that the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 14 is increased. It is also possible to make the direction higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  Below the first special symbol display 8a, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as the start memory or the start prize memory) 4 is displayed. A first special symbol storage memory display 18a made up of two indicators (for example, LEDs) is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators that are turned on by one every time there is an effective start winning. Then, every time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Below the second special symbol display 8b is a second special symbol hold comprising four indicators (for example, LEDs) for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. A storage indicator 18b is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators that are turned on by one every time there is an effective start winning. Then, every time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  In addition, the display screen of the effect display device 9 is provided with a total pending storage display unit 18c as an area for displaying the total number (total pending memory count) that is the sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count. It has been. In this way, by providing the summation pending storage display unit 18c that displays the total number, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that have not met the variable display start condition. In addition, you may make it provide each display area | region of the 1st reservation memory display part which displays the 1st reservation memory number, and the 2nd reservation memory display part which displays the 2nd reservation memory number.

  The display related to the reserved memory such as the number of reserved memories performed in the first special symbol reserved memory display 18a, the second special symbol reserved memory display 18b, and the total reserved memory display unit 18c is referred to as a reserved memory display. In this way, in the first special symbol hold storage display 18a, the second special symbol hold storage display 18b, and the combined hold storage display unit 18c, the number of the right to perform the variable display is set to each right in a visible manner. Corresponding hold storage display is performed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 that opens and closes only the second start winning opening 14 is provided. Any of the start winning ports 14 may be provided with a variable winning ball device that performs an opening / closing operation.

  While the effect display device 9 is displaying the variation of the effect symbol, a reach state may occur. Here, in the reach state, when the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9 constitute a part of the combination of jackpot symbols, the change of the effect symbols that are not yet stopped and displayed continues. Or a display state in which all or a part of the effect symbols fluctuate synchronously while constituting all or part of a combination of jackpot symbols. In other words, reach means a state in which identification information constitutes a specific display result in a plurality of variable display areas, but at least some of the variable areas are in variable display. In this embodiment, the reach state is formed, for example, in a state where the same symbol is stopped in the left and right symbol display areas and the symbol is not stopped in the middle symbol display area. The symbols stopped in the left and right symbol display areas when the reach state is formed are called reach formation symbols or reach symbols.

  The display effect in the reach state is reach effect display (reach effect). In addition, during the reach, an unusual performance may be performed with a lamp or sound. This production is called reach production. Further, in the case of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from a design (effect design etc.)) or a display mode (for example, a color etc.) of the background image of the effect display device 9 is displayed. ) May change. This change in character display and background display mode is called reach effect display. In addition, some reach is set such that when it appears, a big hit is more likely to occur than a normal reach (normal reach), and there is a high degree of reliability for the big hit. Such special (specific) reach is called super reach.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball device 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and can be changed into an open state (first state) in which a game ball can be won and a closed state (second state) in which the game ball does not win. Device. Note that the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 may be configured so that in the closed state, it is difficult to win, but it is possible to win (that is, it is difficult for a game ball to win). Thus, the state in which the special variable winning ball device 20 is in the closed state may be a state in which the game ball is difficult to win or does not win the special variable winning ball device 20.

  In the special variable winning ball apparatus 20, when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. In a specific game state (a big hit game state) that occurs at the time, the open / close plate is controlled by the solenoid 21 to be opened, so that the big winning opening serving as a winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  In the big hit gaming state, repeated continuous control is performed in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 repeats an open state and a closed state. In the repeated continuation control, a state where the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened is called a round (may be indicated by a symbol R). In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of jackpots are provided. When it is determined that a jackpot is to be made, one of the jackpot types is selected. In the present embodiment, the control example in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened only once in one round is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may make it perform the control which makes the ball | bowl apparatus 20 open.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided below the effect display device 9. The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information called “normal symbols” (for example, “◯” and “x”).

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the display variation of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, the left and right lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized at the time of lighting) are alternately turned on to perform the variable display. For example, if the left lamp is turned on at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol “◯”), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the normal symbol is a stop symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 14). To change.

  In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having four indicators (for example, LEDs) for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of indicators that are turned on by one. Then, each time the variable symbol display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of indicators that are lit is reduced by one. There are four upper limit values for the number of reserved general symbols, and the normal symbol storage memory indicator 41 lights up the indicator with these four as upper limit values.

  Decorative LEDs 25 are provided as lamps (light-emitting bodies) blinking and displayed during the game on the left and right sides of the game area 7 of the game board 6, and an outlet 26 for receiving a hit ball that has not won a prize is provided at the bottom. is there. In addition, two speakers 27R and 27L that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. A top frame LED 28a, a left frame LED 28b, and a right frame LED 28c as lamps (light emitting bodies) provided on the front frame are provided on the outer periphery upper portion, the outer periphery left portion, and the outer periphery right portion of the game area 7. For example, the top frame LED 28a, the left frame LED 28b, and the right frame LED 28c are related to each other in the re-variation period (including the initial variation period) during one variation period as a repetitive variation pattern. When an effect such that the effect is executed) is executed, blinking control is performed.

  The repeated variation pattern refers to a variation pattern in which a reach effect is executed after a predetermined effect display is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times from the start of the change display of the special symbol and the effect symbol until the display result is derived and displayed. . Here, the predetermined effect display is, for example, an effect display such as an effect display for re-variation, and if it is an effect display that can be repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times, for example, an effect display other than the re-change display such as a notice display. May be. In this embodiment, as an example of the repeated variation pattern, an example will be described in which a pseudo-variable variation pattern that can be repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times with re-variation as a predetermined effect display is described.

  Here, the pseudo-ream is an effect display that makes it appear that a plurality of fluctuations corresponding to a plurality of reserved memories are continuously performed although it is a single fluctuation corresponding to one reserved memory. Abbreviation for pseudo-continuous variation.

  In addition, the pseudo-ream is within the variation time determined with respect to one start winning prize in order to make it appear as if multiple symbols of variable display (variable display) have been executed for one starting winning prize. In this case, a special variation pattern (also referred to as a variation display pattern) in which temporary stop and re-variation are executed a predetermined number of times for all the symbol strings (left, middle, right). For example, the greater the number of re-variation repeated executions (also referred to as quasi-continuous re-variation times), the greater the reliability that will be the big hit (when the big hit is made for all the selection ratios, including when the big hit is out of place The degree of the ratio selected in the above, the ratio of the jackpot, that is, the reliability of the jackpot) is increased. More specifically, the ratio selected when it is determined that the jackpot is high. In the pseudo-continuous variation pattern, a combination of symbols temporarily stopped in the effect display device 9 is called a temporary stop symbol combination. The combination of temporary stop symbols is determined as one of the pseudo consecutive chances among a plurality of types of chances (hereinafter referred to as pseudo continuous chances) composed of combinations of symbols other than the jackpot symbol combination. Further, when the pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed, some reach effect may be executed as a final reach state.

  Also, a prize ball LED 51 that is turned on when there is a remaining number of prize balls is provided in the vicinity of the left frame LED 28b, and a ball cut LED 52 that is turned on when the supply ball is cut is provided in the vicinity of the right frame LED 28c. . The top frame LED 28a, the left frame LED 28b, the right frame LED 28c, and the decoration LED 25 are examples of effects light emitters provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition to the above-described various LEDs for production (decoration), LEDs and lamps for production are installed.

  An operation button 130 that can be operated by the player by a pressing operation is provided at a predetermined position on the right side of the hitting ball supply tray 3. The operation button 130 is provided with an operation detection switch 131 for detecting an operation. Note that the operation button 130 is not limited to a button to be pressed, and may be configured by other types of operation means such as a pressable jog button and a rotatable jog dial. Such an operation button 130 is requested to be operated when a predetermined effect is performed, for example, an operation is performed according to the effect during the variable display.

  In addition, a prepaid card unit (hereinafter also simply referred to as “card unit”) that enables lending a ball by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (not shown).

  In the hit type table of FIG. 2, for each jackpot type, the jackpot probability after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the base after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the variation time after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the number of times the jackpot is released (round) Number) and the opening time of each round. As shown in FIG. 2, as the jackpot gaming state with different numbers of rounds, there are provided a plurality of types of jackpot gaming states including 9 round (9R) jackpot gaming state and 2 rounds (2R) jackpot gaming state.

  Specifically, in the 9-round big hit gaming state, after the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is in the open state, a predetermined open state end condition (a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed in the open state). Alternatively, the closed state is established in response to the establishment of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls in which a winning ball is generated. When the opening end condition is satisfied, a continuation right is generated and the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of times of opening in the big hit gaming state reaches 9 rounds (final round) which is a predetermined upper limit value.

  Also, in the two-round big hit gaming state, after the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is in the open state, a predetermined open state end condition (a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed in the open state) Alternatively, the closed state is established in response to the establishment of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls in which a winning ball is generated. When the opening end condition is satisfied, a continuation right is generated and the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of times of opening in the big hit gaming state reaches two rounds (final round) at which a predetermined upper limit value is reached.

  In this way, the big hit of 2 rounds is allowed up to the number of times of opening the grand prize opening less than 9 rounds (2 times in this embodiment), but the opening time of the big prize opening is short (for example, 0 .5 seconds) type of jackpot (type). In the case of the present embodiment, as a big hit of two rounds, the opening time of the grand prize opening is extremely short (0.5 seconds), and substantially a prize ball (a prize ball paid out for the prize) is obtained. There is a hit that is not possible.

  In addition, as a big hit of two rounds, it is possible to provide only a hit where a prize ball cannot be obtained, or only a hit where a prize ball can be obtained. Both a win and a win from which a prize ball can be obtained may be provided.

  Among the “big hits”, after being controlled to the big hit game state of 9 rounds or 2 rounds, there is a probability that the special game state is determined to be a big hit compared to the normal state (the normal game state which is not a probability change state). A type of jackpot (type) that shifts to a high probability state (an abbreviation of a probability variation state, also referred to as a high probability state) is called “probability big hit”. In the present embodiment, the special gaming state is controlled to a time-short state in which the variation time (variation display period) of the special symbol or the production symbol is shortened from the non-time-short state in association with the probability variation state. There is. Note that the special gaming state may be controlled to the short time state independently of the probability variation state.

  In this way, the transition time to the short-time state reduces the variation time of the special symbol and the production symbol. Therefore, when the short-time state is reached, it is easy for an effective start winning to occur, and a big hit game may be performed. Rise.

  It should be noted that, among the “big hits”, “normal big hits” may be provided as types of jackpots (types) that do not shift to the probable change state after being controlled to the 9 or 2 round big hit gaming state. In the present embodiment, an example in which a normal big hit is not provided for the nine round big hit is shown. Moreover, you may provide "normal jackpot" about either one or both of the big hit of 9 rounds and the big hit of 2 rounds.

  In addition, as the special game state, the frequency of the game ball entering the variable prize ball device 15 is increased by increasing the frequency at which the variable prize ball device 15 is opened in association with the probability change state. There is a case where it is controlled to an electric chew support control state that facilitates winning (higher approach, higher frequency) to the device 15. Note that the special game state may be controlled to the electric chew support control state independently of the probability change state.

  Here, electric Chu support control will be described. As electric support control, normal symbol variation time (time from the start of variation display to display result derivation display time) is shortened and the display result is derived and displayed at an early stage (normal symbol shortening control), normal symbol The control to increase the probability that the stop symbol will be a winning symbol (ordinary symbol probability changing control), the control to increase the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 (opening time extension control), and the number of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased. Control (opening number increase control) is performed. When such control is performed, the time ratio during which the variable winning ball device 15 is open is higher than when the control is not performed. As a result, the game ball is likely to start and win (the special symbol display devices 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9 are more likely to satisfy the variable display execution condition). Further, by increasing the winning frequency to the second starting winning port 14 by such control, a gaming state is achieved in which the frequency of establishment of the second starting condition and / or the frequency of execution of the variable display of the second special symbol is increased.

  The state in which the winning frequency to the second start winning opening 14 is increased by such electric Chu support control (high frequency state) is the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls according to the winning with respect to the number of shot balls. Since the ratio “base” is higher than when the control is not performed, it is called “high base state”. Further, when such control is not performed, it is called a “low base state”. Such control is control for facilitating winning in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 by supporting the winning with the variable winning ball apparatus 15, that is, the electric tulip, and is referred to as “electric chew support control”.

  Furthermore, as the electric chew support control, by shifting to a state in which any one of a normal symbol shortening control state, a normal symbol probability changing control state, an opening time extension control state, and an opening number increase control state are combined, You may make it transfer to a high base state. In addition, as the electric chew support control, by shifting to any one of the normal symbol shortening control state, the normal symbol probability changing control state, the opening time extension control state, and the opening number increasing control state, You may make it transfer to a state. As described above, as the electric chew support control, any one of a normal symbol shortening control state, a normal symbol probability changing control state, an opening time extension control state, and an opening number increasing control state, any one of a plurality (all) Any control may be performed as long as the control is performed in a combined state or a combined state.

  In the present embodiment, the special game state is controlled to the time reduction state and the electric chew support control state accompanying the probability changing state. Note that the special gaming state may be controlled to the time-saving state and the electric chew support control state independently of the probability changing state. In addition, as a relationship between the short time state and the electric chew support control state in the special game state, the electric chew support control state may be controlled in association with the short time state. You may make it control to a control state.

  In the case of this embodiment, after the big hit gaming state, as the special gaming state, when it is controlled to the probability changing state, it is controlled to the time reduction state and the electric Chu support control state, but when it is controlled to the probability changing state In some cases, it may not be controlled to the short-time state and the electronic chew support control state. In addition, after the end of the big hit gaming state, when the normal state is entered instead of being controlled to the probability variation state, the state may be controlled to the short time state in which the period is limited by the variable display count and the electric chew support control state.

  In this embodiment, “high probability state (probability variation state)” and “low probability state (non-probability variation state)” are used as terms indicating the state of jackpot probability, and terms indicating a combination of base states are used. , “High base state (electric Chu support control state)” and “low base state (non-electric Chu support control state)” are used.

  Further, in this embodiment, the terms “low accuracy low base state”, “high accuracy high base state”, and “high accuracy low base state” are used as terms indicating the combination of the state of the big hit probability and the base state. Use. It may be possible to control to the “low accuracy and high base state”. The “low probability low base state” is a state indicating that the state of the big hit probability is the low probability state and the base state is the low base state. The “high probability high base state” is a state indicating that the state of the big hit probability is the high probability state and the base state is the high base state. The “high probability low base state” is a state indicating that the state of the big hit probability is the high probability state and the base state is the low base state. The “low probability high base state” is a state indicating that the state of the big hit probability is the low probability state and the base state is the high base state.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a probabilistic big hit is provided as the nine round big hit. In addition, as a big hit of the two rounds, an abrupt big hit is provided.

  The probability variation jackpot is a jackpot in which control is performed to shift to the probability variation state, the time reduction state, and the electric chew support control state (high probability high base state) after the end of the nine round jackpot gaming state. In the probable big hit, the probable state continues for a period until the earlier condition of the condition that the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times of 8 times or the condition that the next big hit occurs is satisfied. . Further, in the probability variation big hit, the condition that the time reduction state and the electric chew support control state are executed for a predetermined number of times that the fluctuation display is 20 times or the condition that the next big hit occurs is earlier. It continues for a period until the other condition is satisfied.

  In the probability variation big hit, the probability variation state, the time reduction state, and the electric support support control state are continued for the period until the condition that the next big hit occurs is satisfied regardless of the fluctuation display count. Also good.

  The sudden hit big hit is a big hit in which control to shift to the probability changing state, the time-short state, and the electric chew support control state (highly accurate high base state) is performed after the end of the two rounds of the big hit gaming state. In the sudden big hit, the probability change state continues for a period until the earlier condition of the condition that the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times of 8 times or the condition that the next big hit occurs is established. . Further, in the sudden hit, the condition that the time reduction state and the electric chew support control state are executed a predetermined number of times that the change display is 20 times or the condition that the next big hit occurs is earlier. It continues for a period until the other condition is satisfied.

  In the sudden big hit, the probability variation state, the short time state, and the electric support support control state are continued for a period until the next big hit condition is satisfied, regardless of the fluctuation display count. Also good. Further, in the sudden big hit, the period during which the probability variation state continues may be different from the period during which the probability variation state continues in the probability variation big hit. Further, in the sudden hit, the period in which the short-time state and the electric chew support control state continue may be different from the period in which the short-time state and the electric chew support control state continue in the probable big hit. Further, in the sudden hit, the transition is made to the probability variation state, but the state may be the time-short state and the state where the transition is not made to the electric chew support control state (high probability low base state).

  In the big hit, the number of rounds is small (twice) and the opening of the big prize opening is very short (open for 0.5 seconds). When notifying that it has become, it is possible to make it appear to the player as if it has suddenly changed into a certain probability change state, which is called “sudden probability change big hit”. “Suddenly probable big hit” may be referred to by the abbreviation “surprise big hit” or “surprise”. In this embodiment, the two-round probability variation big hit is referred to as “surprise big hit”. Such a big hit is a hit where a winning ball is not substantially obtained since the half-second opening is performed only twice in the big hit gaming state.

  It should be noted that when the variable display result is a combination of a predetermined small hit symbol, the small is a hit (advantageous state) when the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened with the same number of times of opening and the same opening time as the sudden big hit. You may make it control by hit. In the case of using the structure for controlling the small hit in this way, for example, when the big hit gaming state is reached, the high hit low base state is controlled after the big hit gaming state is finished, and when the small hit is reached, the small hit game After the state ends, both the big hit probability and the base state may not be changed from those before the start of the small hit gaming state. The small hit in this case is a hit in which a gaming state such as a big hit probability and a base state is maintained after the small hit gaming state ends and before the start of the small hit gaming state.

  When a small hit is provided in this way, if it is determined that the big hit game state is in the low probability low base state, the high probability low base state will be obtained after the big hit gaming state of the big hit probability is completed. The base state is the same low base state as the state after the end of the small hit gaming state when it is determined that the small hit in the low probability low base state. This makes it difficult for the player to identify whether the winning position is a big hit or a small hit when the winning hole is opened twice in the low probability low base state. The fun of the game is improved.

  In this embodiment, the small hit may be a special hit in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened with the same number of times of opening and the same opening time as that of the big hit game in the small hit gaming state. Although the opening mode of the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is not completely the same as the opening mode at the time of the big hit, it may be difficult to distinguish from the opening mode at the big hit. In other words, as a small hit, the special variable winning ball device 20 may be opened when the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened with substantially the same number of times of opening and substantially the same opening time as the big hit.

  In addition, for the big hit game hit, after the big hit game state, the base state is set to the low base state and the variable time state is set to the non-time-short state, and after the big hit game state is finished, the base state is increased. As the base state, there may be provided separately the second sudden hit big hits in which the variable time state is the short time state, and these sudden hit big hits may be selected at a predetermined ratio.

  In this way, when the first and second big hits are provided, for example, the second special big hit is selected as the second special symbol that is shorter in time than the first special symbol. What is necessary is just to set the ratio made high. In this way, in the electric chew support control state, since the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is frequently changed to the open state, the frequency of the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is increased. Due to the open mode of the special variable winning ball apparatus 20, the 2nd round winning big hit is an unfavorable hit for the player in terms of the number of winning balls obtained compared to the normal round and the probable big hit of 9 rounds. Players are easily discouraged. Therefore, in the probability variation state and the electric chew support control state, the second special symbol display 8b is a two-round sudden probability big hit which is disadvantageous for the player in terms of the number of prize balls obtained from the nine round normal big hit and the probability variable big hit. Even if it occurs due to the display result, if the rate of control in the time-saving state is increased, the player is controlled not only in discouragement like in the case of non-time-saving state but also in the time-saving state. In some cases, the stored memory data is digested at an early stage, so that the player can be satisfied.

  In addition, as a hit where a prize ball cannot be obtained substantially, such as a big hit, it is a big hit of 9 rounds, but since the opening time per round is extremely short, for example, 0.1 seconds, It is also possible that no prize ball is obtained. In addition, as a winning where a prize ball is not substantially obtained, a prize ball is substantially obtained by executing at least one of a small number of rounds or a short opening time per round. Anything that doesn't exist. Specifically, for a big hit (similarly for a small hit) for which a prize ball cannot be obtained, the number of times of opening is 2 and the opening time is 0.5 seconds, or the number of times of opening is 9 and the opening time is 0.00. What is necessary is just to set like 1 second. Also, instead of a big hit (similarly for a small hit) in which a prize ball cannot be obtained, for example, a big hit with 2 times of opening and an opening time of 29 seconds, or an opening time of 9 times and an opening time. Like the big hit of 5 seconds, the total value of the opening time in the big hit gaming state is shorter than the big hit (probable big hit) of 9 rounds (opening time 29 seconds), so the big hit of 9 rounds (opening time 29 seconds) A big hit with fewer prize balls than the (probable big hit) may be provided.

  In addition, the number of rounds is the same as the big hit, but the number of rounds is the same, such as providing a big hit with an opening pattern with a long opening time and a big hit with an opening pattern with a short opening time. A plurality of patterns with different opening patterns are provided, so that the selection is executed at different selection ratios when the first special symbol fluctuation display is a big hit and when the second special symbol fluctuation display is a big hit. It may be.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 3 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31.

  The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as a storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit. 57. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to make a big hit based on the display result of the special symbol variation display. The random number circuit 503 updates the numerical data according to the set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and generates the random data at random timing. Based on the fact that the starting winning time is the time of reading (extracting) the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the read numerical data becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 503 includes a numeric data update range selection setting function (initial value selection setting function and upper limit value selection setting function), numeric data update rule selection setting function, and numeric data update rule selection. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560). The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  The game control microcomputer 560 reads the numerical data as random R from the random number circuit 503 when a start winning to the first start port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a occurs, and starts to change the special symbol and the effect symbol Sometimes it is determined whether or not to make a jackpot display result as a specific display result based on the random R, that is, whether or not to make a jackpot display result. Then, when it is determined to be a big hit, the gaming state is shifted to a big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state advantageous to the player.

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created on the power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (a special symbol process flag, the value of each reserved storage number counter, etc.) and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  A reset signal (not shown) from the power supply board is input to the reset terminal of the game control microcomputer 560. A reset circuit for generating a reset signal supplied to the game control microcomputer 560 and the like is mounted on the power supply board. When the reset signal becomes high level, the game control microcomputer 560 and the like are in an operable state, and when the reset signal becomes low level, the game control microcomputer 560 and the like are in an operation stop state. Therefore, an allowable signal that allows the operation of the game control microcomputer 560 or the like is output during a period when the reset signal is at a high level, and a game control microcomputer when the reset signal is at a low level. An operation stop signal for stopping the operation of 560 or the like is output. Note that the reset circuit may be mounted on each electric component control board (a board on which a microcomputer for controlling the electric parts is mounted).

  Further, a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board has dropped below a predetermined value is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the power supply board monitors the voltage value of a predetermined voltage (for example, DC30V, DC5V, etc.) used in the gaming machine, and when the voltage value decreases to a predetermined value (the power supply voltage is reduced). A power supply monitoring circuit that outputs a power-off signal indicating that). A clear signal (not shown) indicating that the clear switch for instructing to clear the contents of the RAM is operated is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 560.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. Also, an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening according to a command from the game control microcomputer 560 is also provided. It is mounted on the substrate 31. Further, an information output circuit (not shown) for outputting an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. An effect control command is received, and display control is performed with the effect display device 9 for variably displaying effect symbols. In addition, the operation detection signal of the operation detection switch 131 for detecting the operation of the operation button 130 is input to the effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 80.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 4, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 has an effect control microcomputer 100 including an effect control CPU 101 and a RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives signals from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77. In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. The VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by the VDP. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9.

  The effect control CPU 101 reads necessary data from a character ROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The character ROM is for storing character image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, a character, a figure, a symbol, etc. (including effect symbols) in advance. The effect control CPU 101 outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP 109. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the data input from the effect control CPU 101.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 4 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  Further, the production control CPU 101 receives an operation detection signal input from the operation detection switch 131 via the input driver 106 and the input port 107.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a drive signal to each LED provided on the frame side such as the top frame LED 28a, the left frame LED 28b, and the right frame LED 28c. Further, a drive signal is supplied to the decoration LED 25 provided on the game board side. When a light emitter other than the LED is provided, a drive circuit (driver) for driving the light emitter is mounted on the lamp driver substrate 35.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplifier circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speakers 27R and 27L. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time-series manner in a predetermined period (for example, the changing period of the effect design).

  Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After executing a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S (hereinafter simply referred to as S) 1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (S3). Then, after initialization of the built-in device (initialization of the CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are the built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit)) (S4), the RAM is made accessible. Set (S5). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (S6). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes normal initialization processing (S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing for the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (S7). If it is confirmed that such a protection process has not been performed, the CPU 56 executes an initialization process. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  If it is confirmed that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 checks the data in the backup RAM area (S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 performs a game state restoration process (in S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (S42). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing of S41 and S42, the saved contents remain as they are in the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The parts that should not be initialized include, for example, data indicating a gaming state before stopping power supply (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time reduction flag, etc.), and an area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer) ), A portion where data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (S43). Then, the process proceeds to S14.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (S10). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) may be left as it is. The initial address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (S12).

  By the processing of S11 and S12, for example, a random number counter for normal symbol determination, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, etc. Is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed an initialization process). Is transmitted to the sub-board (S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initially setting the random number circuit 503 (S14). For example, the CPU 56 performs setting according to the random number circuit setting program to cause the random number circuit 503 to update the value of the random R.

  In S15, the CPU 56 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, for example, a value corresponding to 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (S17) and the initial value random number update process (S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (S16), and when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are completed, the interrupt enabled state is set. (S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether to reach when it is not a big hit, The random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win for a normal symbol (normal random number generation counter for normal symbol determination). It is a random number to determine. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls game devices such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, or a game machine control process), the count value of the random number for determination per normal symbol is one round (the random number for determination per normal symbol is taken). When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values), an initial value is set in the counter.

  In this embodiment, the reach effect is executed using an effect symbol (decorative symbol) that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9. Further, when the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the reach effect is always executed. When the display result of the special symbol is not a jackpot symbol, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not to execute the reach effect by lottery using a random number. However, it is the production control microcomputer 100 that actually executes the reach production control.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of S20 to S34 shown in FIG. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing.

  In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when a power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input via the input driver circuit 58, and their state is determined (switch processing: S21). .

  Next, the CPU 56 has a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the on-hold storage display 41 is executed (S22). For the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, control for outputting a drive signal to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in S32 and S33. Execute.

  Further, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each random number for determination such as a random number for normal symbol determination used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: S24, S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol process (S26). In the special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed in accordance with a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol indicator 8a, the second special symbol indicator 8b, and the special winning opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, the normal symbol process is performed (S27). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process for outputting data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 (S30). Specifically, the payout control micro mounted on the payout control board 37 in response to winning detection based on any of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (S31: output processing).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of special symbols in an output buffer for setting special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( S32). For example, when the start speed set in the special symbol process is set, the CPU 56 sets the end flag until the end flag is set. Then, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by one. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a drive signal in S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer, whereby the first special symbol and the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b. 2 Executes the variable display of special symbols.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process of setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( S33). For example, when the start flag related to the variation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 switches the display state (“◯” and “×”) for the variation rate of the normal symbol every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer.

Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (S34), and the process ends.
With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 2 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes of S21 to S33 (excluding S29) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  When the shift symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the change display state of the effect symbol is displayed after the effect symbol change display is started. There may be a case where a predetermined combination of effect symbols that does not reach reach is stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state. Such a variation display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal shift”) variation display mode in a case where the variation display result is a loss symbol.

  When the shift symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the change display state of the effect symbol is displayed after the effect symbol change display is started. After reaching the reach state, a reach effect is executed, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not eventually become a jackpot symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variation display result of the effect symbol is referred to as a variation display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach disengagement”) when the variation display result is “out of”.

  In this embodiment, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the reach effect is executed after the variation display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. Finally, the effect symbols are all stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas of the effect display device 9.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random R: A random counter for hit determination for determining whether or not to make a big hit. Random R is updated one by one at 10 MHz, is added and updated from 0, and is added and updated to its upper limit of 65535, and then is added and updated again from 0.

  (2) Random 1 (MR1): Determines the type of jackpot (any type of type, normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, or sudden hit jackpot) and jackpot symbol (for jackpot type determination, jackpot symbol determination).

  (3) Random 2 (MR2): The type (type) of the variation pattern is determined (for variation pattern type determination).

  (4) Random 3 (MR3): A variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination).

  (5) Random 4 (MR4): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination).

  (6) Random 5 (MR5): An initial value of random 4 is determined (for determining a random 4 initial value).

  In this embodiment, as described above, the big hit that is the specific gaming state includes a plurality of types such as a normal big hit, a probability variation big hit, and a sudden big hit. Therefore, when the big hit is determined, the big hit type is determined as one of these big hit types based on the value of the big hit type determination random number (random 1). Furthermore, when the type of jackpot is determined, the jackpot symbol is also determined based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 1) at the same time. Therefore, random 1 is also a jackpot symbol determining random number.

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern is first determined using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and then the variation pattern determined using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). One of the variation patterns included in the pattern type is determined. Thus, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

  The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. One or more variation patterns belong to the variation pattern type. When determining a variation pattern, first, a variation pattern type is determined using a random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2). Then, one variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined variation pattern type using a variation pattern determination random number (random 3).

  In this embodiment, when a normal big hit and a probable big hit, they are classified into a normal reach fluctuation pattern type that is a fluctuation pattern type with normal reach and a fluctuation pattern type with super reach. In the case of a big hit, it is classified into a non-reach special variation pattern type that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern and a reach special variation pattern type that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with reach. It is divided. Such variation pattern types are selected at a predetermined rate.

  In the case of outliers, a normal variation pattern type that is a variation pattern type that does not involve reach, a normal reach variation pattern type that is a variation pattern type that involves normal reach, and a super reach variation that is a variation pattern type that involves super reach. They are classified into pattern types.

  In such a variation pattern type, when the display result is out of place, the selection ratio of the variation pattern type is different between the time-short state and the time-short state when not in the time-short state (compared to the time-short state and not the time-short state). Therefore, the rate of selection of variation pattern types with a short variation time such as normal variation pattern types is set to be high). , Fluctuation time is shortened. In addition, such a variation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio is different between the case where the total number of memory of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is equal to or larger than the predetermined number and the case where the total number is less than the predetermined number. As a result, when the number of reserved memories of each special symbol that displays a variation is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, the variation time may be shortened compared to when the number of reserved memories of each special symbol is less than the predetermined number . Control for shortening the variable display time in this way is referred to as hold number reduction control.

  In S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 6, the game control microcomputer 560 uses a counter for generating a big hit type determination random number (random 1) and a normal symbol determination random number (random 4). Count up (1 addition update). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2, random 3) or initial value random numbers (random 5). In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may use random numbers other than said random number. In this embodiment, an example of using a random number generated by hardware incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 (or hardware external to the game control microcomputer 560) as the jackpot determination random number. As shown, random numbers generated by software such as random numbers 1 to 5 may be used as the jackpot determination random number.

  FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 8A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal (non-probability change) jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state, that is, a non-probability change state), and a probability change jackpot determination table used in a probability change state.

  Each value described in the left column of FIG. 8 (A) is set as a big hit determination value in the normal jackpot determination table, and is described in the right column of FIG. 8 (A) in the probability change big hit determination table. Each value is set as a big hit judgment value. The big hit judgment value set in the jackpot determination table at the time of probability change is the big hit judgment value common to the big hit judgment value set in the normal big hit judgment table (also called the first big hit judgment value), Is added, the number of jackpot determination values is larger (10 times the number) than the probability change jackpot determination table. As a result, the probability variation state is determined to be a big hit with a higher probability than the normal state.

  In the case of this embodiment, in the normal jackpot determination table, the ratio of the jackpot determination value to the total number of random R is 1/100. As a result, the ratio at which the big hit is determined in the normal time (non-probability change time) is 1/100. In the case of this embodiment, in the probability change jackpot determination table, the ratio of the jackpot determination value to the total number of random R is 1/10. As a result, the rate at which the decision to determine the big hit at the time of probability change is 1/10.

  In the following description, out of the big hit judgment values set in the normal big hit judgment table and the probable change big hit judgment table, the normal big hit judgment value set in the normal big hit judgment table is the probability variation. It is also used as a common jackpot determination value in the hourly jackpot determination table, and is called a normal jackpot determination value (also referred to as a first jackpot determination value). Of the big hit judgment values set in the probability change big hit judgment table, the big hit judgment values (also referred to as second big hit judgment values) other than the normal big hit judgment value are the above-mentioned normal big hit judgment values during the probability change. It is used as a unique jackpot judgment value in addition to the judgment value, and is called a jackpot judgment value at the time of probability change.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the big hit determination random number (random R). The big hit determination random number is shown in FIG. If it matches any one of the big hit determination values shown, it is decided to make a big hit (probability big hit or sudden hit big hit) for the special symbol. Further, when the jackpot determination random number value does not match any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. Note that the “probability” shown in FIG. 8A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol.

  FIGS. 8B and 8C are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 54. Among these, FIG. 8 (B) uses a hold memory (also referred to as a first hold memory) based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening 13 (that is, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). This is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) used when determining the jackpot type.

  Further, FIG. 8C shows the use of reserved memory (also referred to as second reserved memory) based on the fact that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 (that is, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed). This is a second special symbol jackpot type determination table used when determining the jackpot type.

  Each of the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 8 (B) and the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 8 (C) is determined when the variable display result is determined to be a jackpot symbol. In addition, based on a random number (random 1) for determining the big hit type, to determine the big hit type as one of “normal big hit”, “probable big hit”, or “surprising big hit” and to determine the big hit symbol It is a table that is referred to.

  The first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 8B is a numerical value to be compared with a random value of 1, which corresponds to each of “probable big hit” and “sudden big hit” (big hit type determination). Value) is set.

  The second special symbol jackpot type judgment table of FIG. 8C is a numerical value to be compared with a random value of 1, and each of the judgment values corresponding to the “probable big hit” and “surprise big hit” (big hit type judgment) Value) is set. In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table, more judgment values corresponding to “probability big hit” are set and in comparison with the first special symbol jackpot type judgment table, fewer judgment values corresponding to “probable big hit” are set. ing. Therefore, when the big win is based on the fluctuation display result of the second special symbol, the percentage of selection of the big hit type of “surprise big hit” is larger than when the big hit is based on the fluctuation display result of the first special symbol. The ratio that the big hit type of “probable big hit” is selected is high. As a result, when the time is short, the frequency at which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed by starting the winning at the second starting winning port 14 provided with the variable winning ball device 15 is increased. It is possible to increase the probability of winning 9 rounds, improve the ball-out rate, and improve the fun of the game.

  In addition, as the second special symbol big hit type determination table, a table in which “surprise big hit” cannot be selected may be used. In such a case, the second special symbol jackpot type determination table has a lower selection rate of “Crash Prone Hit” than the first special symbol jackpot type determination table, and the rate at which the jackpot type of “probability big hit” is selected. It is possible to obtain the same effect as when the height is increased.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, the big hit type determination value is also used as a determination value (big hit symbol determination value) for determining the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The determination value corresponding to “probable big hit” is also set as the determination value corresponding to “7” of the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The determination value corresponding to the “surprise big hit” is also set as a determination value corresponding to “5” of the first special symbol and the second special symbol of the big hit symbol.

  In this way, in each of the first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 8B and the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 8C, a plurality of determination values are included in one jackpot symbol. It may be associated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for every jackpot symbol, one judgment value may be associated with one jackpot symbol. For example, if there are 100 symbols from “00” to “99”, for example, the big hit symbol “00” corresponds to the big hit symbol “00”, and the big hit symbol “99” is a big hit. The 100 jackpot type determination values “00” to “99” correspond one-to-one to the 100 jackpot symbols “00” to “99”, such that the type determination value “99” corresponds. You may do it.

  Using such a jackpot type determination table, the CPU 56 determines a type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value having the same random 1 value as the jackpot type, and also uses the jackpot pattern having the same random 1 value as the jackpot symbol. Determine the design. Thereby, the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

  In the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 8B and the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 8C, data is set in the following relationship.

  When comparing the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 8 (B) and the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 8 (C), the second special symbol jackpot type of FIG. 8 (C). The determination table has a higher ratio of 9 rounds of big hits (probability change big hits) than the first special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. Thereby, the variable display of the second special symbol can perform the variable display which is advantageous for the player in that it is easier to acquire more prize balls than the variable display of the first special symbol. The reason is that the 9 round jackpot is more in the jackpot gaming state because the open pattern of the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is set to obtain more winning balls than the 2 round jackpot. This is because it is a big hit that can be obtained. That is, since the big hit of 2 rounds is constituted by the hit where a prize ball cannot be obtained substantially, the big hit of 9 rounds can obtain more prize balls than the big hit of 2 rounds.

  In addition, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 8B has a higher ratio of selecting a sudden big hit than the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 8C. For this reason, the variation display of the second special symbol has a higher ratio of determining 9 rounds of jackpot than the variation display of the first special symbol. As a result, a 9-round jackpot is likely to occur for the start winning to the second start winning opening 14, and the fun of the game can be improved. In addition, about the 1st special symbol corresponding to the 1st start winning opening 13 in which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is not provided, you may make it not allocate "surprise big hit" among big hit types. If it does in this way, it will become easy to generate | occur | produce the big hit of 9 rounds about the start winning to the 1st start winning opening 13, and the interest of a game can be improved.

  Further, in this embodiment, the first game that gives a predetermined amount of game value (for example, the number of rounds) as a big hit that is a specific gaming state that controls the gaming state to be more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. Two rounds of big hits (surprise big hits) as the second gaming state, which is disadvantageous to the first gaming state by giving a game value of a smaller amount than the gaming value by 9 rounds as a state (probability big hit) It explains the case of determining. However, the game value given to the specific game state is not limited to the number of rounds as shown in this embodiment. For example, as compared with the second gaming state, the first gaming state may be determined in which the allowable amount of the winning number (count number) of game balls to the big winning opening per round is increased as the gaming value. . Further, for example, the first gaming state may be determined in which the opening time of the big winning opening per one time during the big hit is increased as the gaming value as compared with the second gaming state. Also, for example, even if the same 9 rounds of big hit, a second gaming state in which a big winning opening is opened once per round and a first gaming state in which a big winning opening is opened multiple times per round are prepared. The game value in the first gaming state may be increased by substantially increasing the number of times the special winning opening is opened. In this case, for example, in any case of the second gaming state or the first gaming state, when the big winning opening is opened nine times (in this case, all nine rounds are finished in the second gaming state) However, in the case of the first gaming state, an undigested round remains), and an effect may be executed in such a way as to inquire whether or not the big hit continues further. And, in the case of the second gaming state, all nine rounds are finished internally, so the big hit game is finished, and in the case of the first gaming state, there are still undigested rounds inside. The jackpot game may be continued (ie, an effect as if the bonus winning opening was additionally started with a bonus after finishing the big hit of nine times). Thus, the relationship between the first gaming state and the second gaming state is that the second gaming state is more disadvantageous than the first gaming state due to the gaming value and the like given to the specific gaming state. Anything is acceptable.

  FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an effect example in the effect device such as the effect display device 9 when the hold memory effect is executed. Here, the hold storage effect is a suggestion effect that suggests the display result of the variable display based on each right stored as the hold storage information for each right when the game is shifted to the big hit gaming state. Such a hold storage effect is executed in a pre-read notice effect effect form, which is an effect of pre-reading and pre-notifying the determination result of the hold memory information before the variable display is started. This refers to performing a predetermined effect on the reserved stored image in the combined reserved storage display unit 18c. The prefetching in the prefetching notice effect refers to reading the information content of the pending storage information at a timing before the timing at which the variable display is executed based on the pending storage information.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the reserved memory effect includes a character effect for displaying a predetermined character image on the effect display device 9, and a game such as a display result for the reserved memory image on the summed hold memory display unit 18c in the effect display device 9. Reserved color effects that are displayed in a color that suggests an advantage for the user. Note that the reserved storage effect may be composed of, for example, only the reserved color effect. If the suggestion effect suggests the display result of the variable display based on each right that is reserved and stored, it is performed in any effect mode. It may be a production. For example, as the reserved memory effect, instead of performing the reserved color effect, an effect of changing the pattern, size, or shape of the reserved memory image may be performed. Further, as the reserved memory effect, instead of performing the reserved color effect, for the reserved memory image, from an image having a normal shape and color, for example, a character image or a numerical image corresponding to the expected degree of big hit, etc. An effect of changing to an image with a different image type may be performed. In the following description, the color of the storage image stored in the combined storage storage display unit 18c is referred to as a storage color.

  In the following description, the overall aspect of the on-hold storage effect including the character effect and the on-hold color effect may be referred to as the on-hold storage effect aspect, and the effect aspect of the character effect may be referred to as the on-hold storage effect aspect. The effect mode of the effect may be referred to as a reserved storage effect mode.

  In the state where the hold storage effect is not performed, all the hold storage images 90 in the combined hold storage display unit 18c are displayed regardless of the display result of the variable display based on each right as shown in FIG. It is displayed in white as a predetermined normal color.

  In the 9-round jackpot gaming state with a promising jackpot, the message “Promotion chance!” As shown in FIG. 9A is displayed at a predetermined timing such as when the jackpot gaming state starts. And in each round of the big hit gaming state, as a hold memory effect, an image showing the operation button 130 as shown in FIGS. 9B, 9D, 9F, and 9H at the start of the round. Is displayed, and an operation acceptance image 92 indicating that the operation is accepted is displayed by displaying a message for promoting the operation of the operation button 130 such as “Press the button!”. At that time, a hold memory selection image 91 is displayed that is selected in a manner in which any one of the hold memory images 90 in the combined hold memory display unit 18c is pointed as an effect target of the hold memory effect.

  In the big hit gaming state, as the hold memory effect, one of the hold memory effect of the 1R period and the hold memory effect of the 2R period is selected and performed. For example, as shown in (B), (C), (D), (E), (F), and (G) of FIG. It is an effect to perform. In addition, as shown in (H), (I), and (J) of FIG. 9, for example, the reserved memory effect for the 2R period is a period of 2 rounds (in this example, the fourth round and the fifth round). It is an effect that produces an effect as a period. In the reserved storage effect in the 2R period, for example, as shown in (I) and (J) of FIG. 9, the reserved color in which the reserved color of the reserved storage image 90 changes in the second round (the fifth round in this example). Production is performed.

  In this embodiment, in the reserved storage effect for the 1R period, for example, as shown in (B), (C), (D), (E), (F), and (G) of FIG. Although the character C3 appears but does not operate, the character effect that the background image does not change is performed. On the other hand, in the reserved storage effect for the 2R period, for example, as shown in (I) and (J) of FIG. 9, the character effect is performed after the character C4 appears and the background image changes. Thereby, in the reserved memory effect of 2R period, since the effect content is rich compared with the reserved memory effect of 1R period in which the character does not move and the background image does not change, it is possible to attract the player.

  For example, the first on-hold storage image 90 (first on-hold storage image corresponding to the on-hold storage information scheduled to be variably displayed for the first time after the end of the big hit gaming state) 90 in the total on-hold storage display unit 18c. When the stored image is subjected to the hold memory effect for the 1R period or the hold memory effect for the 2R period, the first hold memory image is the hold memory selection image 91 as shown in FIG. Is selected. The second reserved memory image that is the second reserved memory image 90 (the reserved memory image corresponding to the reserved memory information that is scheduled to be changed and displayed for the second time after the end of the big hit gaming state) in the total pending memory display unit 18c. When the reserved storage effect for the 1R period or the reserved memory effect for the 2R period is executed, the second reserved memory image is selected by the reserved memory selection image 91 as shown in FIG. Is done. The third reserved memory image 90 which is the third reserved memory image (the reserved memory image corresponding to the reserved memory information scheduled to be changed and displayed for the third time after the end of the big hit gaming state) in the total pending memory display unit 18c. When the reserved memory effect for the 1R period or the reserved memory effect for the 2R period is executed, the third reserved memory image is selected by the reserved memory selection image 91 as shown in FIG. Is done. The fourth reserved memory image 90 which is the fourth reserved memory image (the reserved memory image corresponding to the reserved memory information scheduled to be displayed for the fourth time after the end of the big hit gaming state) in the total pending memory display unit 18c. When the reserved storage effect for the 1R period or the reserved memory effect for the 2R period is executed, the fourth reserved memory image is selected by the reserved memory selection image 91 as shown in FIG. Is done.

  The fifth reserved memory image 90 which is the fifth reserved memory image (the reserved memory image corresponding to the reserved memory information scheduled to be changed and displayed for the fifth time after the end of the big hit gaming state) in the total pending memory display unit 18c. When the reserved storage effect for the 1R period or the reserved memory effect for the 2R period is executed, the fifth reserved memory image is selected by the reserved memory selection image 91. The sixth reserved memory image 90 which is the sixth reserved memory image (the reserved memory image corresponding to the reserved memory information scheduled to be displayed in the sixth variation after the end of the big hit gaming state) in the total pending memory display unit 18c. When the reserved storage effect for the 1R period or the reserved memory effect for the 2R period is executed, the sixth reserved memory image is selected by the reserved memory selection image 91. The seventh reserved memory image 90 which is the seventh reserved memory image (the reserved memory image corresponding to the reserved memory information scheduled to be changed and displayed the seventh time after the end of the big hit gaming state) in the total pending memory display unit 18c When the reserved storage effect for the 1R period or the reserved memory effect for the 2R period is executed, the seventh reserved memory image is selected by the reserved memory selection image 91. The eighth on-hold storage image 90 which is the eighth on-hold storage image (the on-hold storage image corresponding to the on-hold storage information scheduled to be changed and displayed for the eighth time after the end of the big hit gaming state) in the total on-hold storage display unit 18c. When the on-hold storage effect for the 1R period is executed, the eighth on-hold storage image is selected by the on-hold storage selection image 91.

  Also, when the 2R period hold memory effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 9H, the hold memory selection image 91 is selected as the effect storage memory image in the first round of the 2R period, In the second round of the 2R period, the reserved storage image to be produced is not selected by the reserved storage selection image 91. As shown in FIG. 32, which will be described later, each round of the big hit gaming state with a probable big hit is associated with an effect target hold storage number for which a hold storage effect is to be performed. The hold memory effect for the 1R period is not executed when there is no hold memory information of the corresponding effect target hold memory number in each round. With respect to the hold storage effect for the 2R period, if there is no hold storage information for the corresponding effect target hold storage number in each round, the hold storage effect for executing the first round of the 2R period is not executed, but the corresponding effect target hold Even when there is no reserved storage information for the storage number, when the hold storage effect for the 2R period is started from the previous round, the second round effect in the hold storage effect for the 2R period is continuously executed. Is done.

  In addition, for example, in the first round, two rounds when the hold memory effect for the 2R period is executed, such as when the hold memory effect for the 2R period is executed in a state where there are two or more hold memory information. In the case where there is hold storage information corresponding to the eyes, in the hold storage effect for the 2R period, only the hold memory information corresponding to the first round is the target of the effect, and therefore there is a correspondence relationship with the second round of the 2R period. The reserved memory information is not a production target in the reserved memory effect during the 2R period. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 32 to be described later, on-hold storage information of the production target hold storage number for which the correspondence is determined in each round based on the correspondence between the round and the production target hold storage number. When there is no, the stored storage effect starting in the round is not executed. Thereby, as for the hold memory information corresponding to the second round when the hold memory effect of 2R period is executed, when the hold memory effect of 2R period ends, the corresponding round ends, The hold memory effect starting in the round will not be executed. In addition, with respect to the hold memory information corresponding to the second round when the hold memory effect of 2R period is executed, it is selected as the effect object of the hold memory effect in the next round after the hold memory effect of 2R period is completed. It may be possible.

  Thus, in the big hit game state of 9 rounds with the probable big hit, when the hold memory effect of 1R period is executed in the first to eighth rounds, the hold memory selection image 91 is used for the hold memory effect image in each round. The on-hold storage image 90 to be produced is identified, and the operation acceptance image 92 indicates that the operation of the operation button 130 by the player is accepted. In addition, in the case where the hold memory effect for the 2R period is executed in any of the first to eighth rounds, the hold memory selection image 91 is used as the effect of the hold memory effect in the first round of the 2R period. The hold storage image 90 is specified, and the operation reception image 92 indicates that the operation of the operation button 130 by the player is received. Such on-hold storage image 90 and operation acceptance image 92 are displayed until a predetermined operation effective period set at a predetermined time elapses from the start of the round in which the production of the 1R period or the 2R period is started. Yes, this is called an operation reception effect.

  Then, in each round of the big hit gaming state, when the operation button 130 is operated by the player before the operation valid period elapses while the operation acceptance effect is being executed, as the reserved memory effect, FIG. ), (E), (G), and characters I1 to C4 shown in (I), a character effect that displays a character image determined corresponding to each round, and a reserved storage selection image in each round. An effect mode in which an on-hold color image is displayed such that the on-hold storage image 90 selected by 91 is displayed in a color that suggests an advantage for the player, such as a display result specified based on the corresponding on-hold storage information. The hold storage effect is executed.

  As a character image used for the character effect executed at the time of the reserved memory effect, the first character C1 shown in FIG. 9C, the second character C2 shown in FIG. 9E, and the third character shown in FIG. 9G. Different character images are provided for each round, such as the character C3 and the fourth character C4 shown in FIG. 9 (I), as shown in FIGS. 9 (C), (E), (G), and (I). The character image determined according to the round is selected and displayed. When the reserved memory effect for the 1R period is executed, the character image corresponding to each round in which the reserved memory effect for the 1R period is executed is selected and displayed. When the reserved memory effect for the 2R period is executed, the character image corresponding to the first round in which the reserved memory effect for the 2R period is executed is selected and displayed over the 2R period.

  Further, in the round in which the hold memory selection image 91 and the operation acceptance image 92 are displayed in the big hit game state, when the operation button 130 is not operated by the player before the operation valid period elapses, the character effect and the hold color effect Is not done. Such an effect that reflects the presence / absence of operation of the operation button 130 in the effect content is called an operation effect. In this way, by executing the hold storage effect when the operation button 130 is operated before the operation valid period elapses, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved and the interest of the game can be improved. .

  As shown in FIG. 9, the character effect and the reserved color effect may be executed on the condition that the operation button 130 is operated, and is executed regardless of whether or not the operation button 130 is operated. (For example, even when the operation button 130 is not operated, it may be executed at a timing when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the round.) Further, in this embodiment, an example in which an effect related to the operation of the operation button 130 is performed when a hold storage effect is performed is shown. However, as the hold storage effect, an effect unrelated to the effect related to the operation of the operation button 130 may be performed. Further, as the reserved memory effect, only the reserved color effect may be performed, and an effect such as a character effect other than the reserved color effect may not be performed.

  As an effect mode of the reserved memory image 90 in the reserved color effect included in the reserved memory effect, an effect mode that maintains white like the second reserved memory image 90 in FIG. 9E, and FIG. ) Such as the first reserved memory image 90 that changes to red or green, and the effect that changes to gold like the fourth reserved memory image 90 of FIG. Control is performed to produce an effect mode selected from a plurality of types of effect modes. In the case of this embodiment, the magnitude relationship of the degree of expectation that is a big hit in the effect mode of the reserved color effect of the reserved stored image 90 is white <green <red <gold. Therefore, in the reserved memory effect, when the reserved color effect is executed in an effect mode in which the reserved memory image 90 is gold, the player's degree of expectation for jackpot can be maximized.

  Here, when the performance mode of the reserved storage effect as the pre-reading notice effect is ranked by rank (ranking / grading) according to the player's advantage, the rank relationship of the notice rank is based on the magnitude relationship of the expectation level that is a big hit (Higher-lower relationship) is white <green <red <gold. In this case, white indicates that the reserved color has not changed from the normal color (white). That is, the production mode of the reserved storage effect can be divided into four ranks, with white as the lowest rank and gold as the highest rank. Note that, for example, when the presentation mode in the hold storage effect is ranked, the ratio of the display result to be a probable big hit and the ratio of the reach display mode to be high in gold and red are the higher ranks of the notice rank, and the display result is Green and white (no effect) with a low percentage of winning and a reach display mode can be divided into two ranks, which are lower ranks of the notice rank.

  Also, for example, as shown in FIGS. 9B to 9G, when the reserved storage effect is shifted to the big hit gaming state, each of the plurality of effect execution timings such as the first to eighth rounds, For example, a predetermined number of on-hold memories such as one are executed at one stage of production execution timing. On the other hand, for example, as shown in FIGS. 9H to 9J, the timing for executing the hold memory effect can be changed by performing the hold memory effect for one hold memory at the execution timing of two rounds. . Thereby, the interest of the game can be further improved by a change in the relationship between the reserved memory effect and the number of reserved memories to be effected.

  In the jackpot gaming state, the on-hold storage effect is performed during the first to eighth round periods as the first period in the jackpot gaming state. Then, in the ninth round (final round) as the second period in the big hit gaming state, a revival effect as shown in FIGS. 9K to 9M is executed. As for the revival effect, at the start of the round, as shown in FIG. 9K, a message indicating the revival effect such as “Re-chance!” Is displayed. In the revival effect, the operation acceptance image 92 is displayed, and the reserved storage selection image 91 for selecting one or a plurality of effect objects (an example having a plurality of effect objects is shown in FIG. 9K). Is displayed. The resurrection effect is started when the operation button 130 is operated within the operation valid period of a predetermined period, as in the case of the hold storage effect. For the rebirth effect, the hold determination data 90 in which the hold storage image 90 is a color other than gold in the period of the first to eighth rounds is targeted for the result that is the jackpot display result or the reach off display result in the actual variation display, This is an effect that makes it possible to rank up the effect mode of the reserved memory effect.

  In the resurrection effect, when the “red”, “green”, or “white” image is included in the reserved storage image, the reserved storage information corresponding to the image is displayed as shown in FIG. As a target, either a resurgence success effect that ranks up at least one of the effect modes of the reserved memory effect, or a resurgence failure effect that does not rank up any of the effect modes of the hold memory effect as shown in FIG. Is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 9 (K), the successful restoration effect is displayed with an operation acceptance image 92 and one or a plurality of effect objects (FIG. 9 (K) shows an example having a plurality of effect objects). A hold storage selection image 91 for selecting is displayed. The reserved storage selection image 91 is displayed in such a manner that the “red”, “green”, or “white” image of the reserved storage image 90 is pointed as a production target.

  When performing the revival effect, the effect mode (hold color) of the reserved storage image 90 as the revival effect is selected for each reserved storage information to be effected. When the effect mode (holding color) is selected to be ranked up for each effect-stored stored image 90, the effect mode is determined as the effect mode in the resurrection effect of each reserved memory image 90. On the other hand, when it is selected that the rendering mode (holding color) is not ranked up for the reserved storage image 90 of each rendering target, it is determined not to change the rendering mode (holding color) of the pending storage image.

  When performing the revival effect, if there is at least one reserved storage image 90 selected to rank up the effect mode (hold color), the revival success effect as shown in FIG. 9 (L) is executed. As a resurgence success effect, a message effect that displays a message indicating that the resurgence was successful, such as “success!” That has been selected to be ranked up, is executed, and the pending storage of the effect target that has been selected to be ranked up Only the image 90 is changed to the newly selected effect mode (holding color). In FIG. 9 (L), as an example, an effect example is shown in which the rank-up selection is performed for both the two reserved storage images 90 to be produced, and the reserved colors of the two reserved storage images 90 are both ranked up. However, for example, when a rank-up selection is made for only one of the two stored storage images 90 in the effect mode, an effect is performed in which only the reserved colors of the corresponding one stored storage image 90 are ranked up. Become.

  On the other hand, when performing the revival effect, if there is no reserved memory image 90 that is selected to rank up the effect mode (hold color), the revival failure effect as shown in FIG. 9M is executed. As the resurrection failure effect, a message effect that displays a message indicating that the resurrection has failed, such as “failure!” That was not selected to be ranked up, is executed, and the effect mode (hold color) of the hold memory image 90 An effect that does not change is executed.

  In this embodiment, even when the stage of appearance (holding color) is selected to be ranked down at the stage of selecting the stage of rendering (holding color) of the reserved stored image when the revival stage is performed, such rank down is performed. Production is not executed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player's expectation from being lowered due to the revival effect, and to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered. It should be noted that at the stage of selecting the effect mode (hold color) of the reserved stored image when performing the revival effect, the effect mode (hold color) may not be selected to be ranked down (for example, using a data table) When selecting an aspect, the data is set using a data table in which data is set so that an effect aspect that ranks lower than the effect aspect of the reserved storage image to be effected is not selected.

  It should be noted that, in the stage of selecting the production mode (holding color) of the reserved stored image when performing the revival production, when the production mode (holding color) is selected to rank down, the production mode (holding) selected as such You may decide to perform the production | generation which ranks down (color). If it does in this way, the production aspect of a revival effect can be made rich in change. In that case, when the production mode (holding color) is selected to greatly rank down, control is performed to limit the width of rank down to one rank down so that the interest of the game is not significantly reduced. Is preferred.

  Regarding such a revival effect, when the operation button 130 is not operated within the operation valid period of a predetermined period, neither the revival success effect nor the revival failure effect is executed, and the effect mode (color) of the reserved stored image is ranked up. The production to be performed is not executed.

  When performing a rebirth effect, the following effect may be performed. For example, when the operation button 130 is operated within the operation effective period of a predetermined period, a roulette provided with a plurality of areas in which characters “success” are written and areas in which characters “failure” are written A roulette effect is displayed in which a mini game image to be rotated is displayed. Then, in the resurrection success effect, the effect mode is only ranked up in the reserved storage image of the effect target that is selected to be ranked up in response to the roulette ball stopping in the area where the characters “success” are described. Production is performed. On the other hand, in the resurrection failure effect, in response to the roulette ball being stopped in the area where the characters “failure” are described, the effect of the reserved memory image for any of the reserved memories to be effected in the resurrection effect An effect that does not increase the rank of the aspect (color) is executed.

  In this way, in the ninth round of the final round of the big hit gaming state, an effect that ranks up the effect mode of the reserved memory production is performed as a revival effect, so that the big hit of the player in the final round in the big hit gaming state Can increase expectations for

  Thus, the hold storage effect for each hold determination data in the big hit gaming state is performed in the 1R period or 2R period in the period of the first to eighth rounds. As a result, the effect pattern for the 1R period using the eight types of characters such as the first character 1R effect to the eighth character 1R effect is provided as the character effect (effect in which the character is stationary) for the effect of the 1R period. It is selected and used for each round. In addition, as a character effect (effect in which the character operates) for the effect of the 2R period, an effect pattern (background change) using seven types of characters such as the first character 2R effect to the seventh character 2R effect Are also selected for each round of the first round of the 2R period and used continuously until the second round. Note that the jackpot gaming state for the probable big hit is the 9th round in the final round, and the 8th round is the 2R period starting in the 8th round because the number of remaining rounds for performing the reserved storage effect is less than 2 rounds. No production pattern is set.

  When the hold memory effect shown in FIG. 9 is executed, when the game shifts to the big hit gaming state, the hold that suggests the display result of the variable display based on each right stored in the hold is indicated by the color of the hold storage display for each right. Since the memory effect is performed, the player can recognize which rights can be expected. Thereby, a player's sense of expectation when it becomes a big hit gaming state can be heightened, and the interest of the game when it becomes a big hit gaming state can be improved.

  FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIG. 10, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to the variation display of the special symbol. (Corresponding to the variation pattern XX, respectively). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each variation pattern that can be used, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the command 80XX (H), the effect display device 9 controls the effect display device 9 to start displaying the effect symbols in a variable manner.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit and the type of big hit. Command 8C01 (H) is an effect control command for designating that it is determined to be out of place. The command 8C02 (H) is an effect control command that specifies that the probability variation jackpot is determined. Command 8C03 (H) is an effect control command for designating that the winning hit is determined.

  The command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that the variation display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that the variation display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specifying command (or symbol variation designation command). Note that information indicating whether to start the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variable pattern command.

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the effect symbol change display (change) is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the effect symbol variation display (variation) and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Command 95XX (H) is an effect control command (winning time determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the winning time determination result. In this embodiment, in the winning effect processing (FIG. 15), which will be described later, the game control microcomputer 560 performs jackpot determination and jackpot type determination at the start winning of the first start winning or the second starting winning. . Such determination is referred to as winning determination. Then, in the EXT data of the determination result designation result command at the time of winning a prize, a determination result of a hit / loss determination result, a big hit type determination result, a variation pattern type as a determination result, and a determination value when determined as a big hit (normal big hit determination value (first 1 determination value) or probability change big hit determination value (second determination value)) is set, and control for transmission to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  Commands A001 and A002 (H) are effect control commands (hit hit start designation command) for designating the start of the big hit game. The jackpot start designation command is transmitted when the start of the jackpot gaming state for the probability variation jackpot (command A001) that is sent when the start of the jackpot gaming state for the probability variation jackpot is designated and the start of the jackpot gaming state for the sudden jackpot game is designated. And a sudden start designation command (command A002).

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of a big winning opening) indicating a display during the opening of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  The command A301 (H) is an effect control command (a jackpot end designation command) for designating the end of the jackpot gaming state for the probability variation jackpot. The command A302 (H) is an effect control command (an abrupt big hit end designation command) that designates the end of the big hit gaming state for the big hit big hit. The jackpot end designation command and the sudden jackpot end designation command are also called hit termination designation commands.

  Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state designation command) that designates that the gaming state is a normal state (low probability low base state). Command B001 (H) is an effect control command (time-short state designation command) for designating that the gaming state is the time-short state. Command B002 (H) is an effect control command (probability change state designation command) for designating that the gaming state is a probability change state.

  By such an effect control command, it is possible to inform the effect control microcomputer 100 which state or combination of the game state is the normal state, the short time state, and the probability variation state. Thereby, in the production control microcomputer 100, it is possible to recognize which state or combination of the normal state, the short-time state, and the probability variation state, so that the normal state It is possible to perform various effects such as image display according to the time-short state and the probability variation state.

  The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (first start prize designation command for designating that there is a start prize in which the first special symbol variation display is performed for the first start prize opening 13, that is, the first start prize is received. ). The command C002 (H) is an effect control command (second start prize designation command for designating that there is a start prize in which the second special symbol variation display is performed for the second start prize port 14, that is, the second start prize has been given. ). Command C003 (H) is an effect control command (holding memory subtraction designation command) for designating subtraction of the number of reserved memories.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the effect display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIG. 10, the display state of the lamp is changed, or the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 560 designates the variation pattern of the effect symbol every time there is a start prize and the variation display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, the presentation control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In addition, as the transmission method of the effect control command, the effect control command data is output from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77 on the eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7, In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-like (rectangular wave) capture signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing capture of the effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process.

  In the example shown in FIG. 10, the variation pattern command and the display result designation command are displayed as the variation display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display. An effect display device 9 that can be used in common with the variation display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol in the device 8b, and performs the effect in accordance with the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is possible to prevent the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 from being increased when controlling the effect parts such as the above.

  Next, the opening pattern data table stored in the ROM 54 will be described. In the opening pattern data table, each of the big hits and small hits for each type includes special numbers including the number of opening (number of rounds upper limit), opening time (opening time during each round), and interval time (time between each round). A data indicating an opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is set.

  For example, in the probability variation big hit, data that the number of times of opening is 9, the opening time is 29 seconds, and the interval time is 5 seconds is set in the opening pattern data table. In the sudden hit, the number of times of opening is two, and data with an interval time of 0.5 seconds is set in the opening pattern data table.

  Note that the interval time may be set to be the same for the probability variation big hit and the sudden big hit. In addition, the number of big hits is set to a certain number of rounds (for example, nine rounds) for big hits that are easy to obtain prize balls (for example, promising big hits of nine rounds) and big hits that are difficult to obtain prize balls (for example, sudden big hits) However, a long opening time at which a prize ball is easily obtained may be set for a big hit where a prize ball is likely to be obtained, and an extremely short opening time at which a prize ball is difficult to be obtained for a big hit where a prize ball is difficult to obtain.

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process (S26) program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31.

  As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, the CPU 56 turns on the first start opening switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13, and the first winning opening 13 (starting first) When the start winning) has occurred, or the second start opening switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 is turned on and the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 is made. When (second start winning) has occurred (S311), start port switch passing processing is executed (S312). Then, any one of S300 to S307 is performed according to the internal state. If the first start port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a is not turned on, any one of S300 to S307 is performed according to the internal state without executing the start port switch passing process.

The processing of S300 to S307 is as follows.
Special symbol normal processing (S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 enters a state where the special symbol variation display can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage buffer (total number of reserved storage). The stored number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the combined hold storage number counter. If the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. In case of big hit, set big hit flag. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) corresponding to S301. The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variation display time: the time from the start of the variation display until the display result is derived and displayed (stopped display)) is the variation time of the variation display of the special symbol. Decide to do. Also, a variable time timer for measuring the special symbol variable time is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S302 (2 in this example).

  Display result designation command transmission process (S302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S303 (3 in this example).

  Special symbol changing process (S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to S304. Update to the corresponding value (4 in this example).

  Special symbol stop process (S304): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The variable display on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is stopped, and the stopped symbol is derived and displayed. Further, control is performed to transmit a symbol confirmation designation command to the production control microcomputer 100. When the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to S305. If the big hit flag is not set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to S300. The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the effect symbol and the decoration symbol when the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received. When the big hit gaming state is a probable change state and the probability change flag is set, the probability change flag is reset (reset regardless of whether the big hit is a promiscuous big hit that is probable. ) Further, when the time-short flag is set in the big hit gaming state, or when the condition for ending the time-short state is satisfied based on the number of times of variable display, the time-short flag is reset. Here, the probability variation flag is a flag that is set when the probability variation state is set and is reset when the probability variation state is determined. The time reduction flag is a flag that is set when the time reduction state is set and is reset when the time reduction state is not set.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (S305): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big winning opening, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is controlled to open the big winning opening according to the opening pattern as described above according to the type of the big hit. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special winning opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S306 (6 in this example). Note that the pre-winner opening pre-processing is executed for each round, but when starting the first round, the pre-opening pre-opening processing is also a process of starting the big hit gaming state.

  Large winning opening open process (S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. A control for transmitting an effect control command for round display during the big hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 100, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to S305. When all rounds are finished, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S307 (7 in this example).

  Big hit end process (S307): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control for causing the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended is performed. In addition, a process for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a probability change flag, a time reduction flag, etc.) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to S300.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process in S312. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the reserved storage buffer in the game control microcomputer 560. In the start port switch passing process executed when at least one of the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a is in the on state, the CPU 56 is turned on by the first start port switch 13a. Whether or not (S211). If the first start port switch 13a is on, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit (specifically, the first reserved memory for counting the first reserved memory number). Whether the number counter value is 4 or not is confirmed (S212). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to S221.

  If the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (S213). Further, the CPU 56 increases the value of the total pending memory number counter indicating the total pending memory number that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number by 1 (S214). When the initial value is “0” and a valid first start winning or second starting winning occurs, the total pending storage number counter is updated by adding “1”, and when the variable display is started, 1 "is subtracted and updated. Further, the CPU 56 corresponds to the value of the total reserved storage number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) for storing the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14. Data indicating “first” is set in the area (S215). The reserved storage specific information storage area will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the reserved storage specific information storage area, when the first start port switch 13a is turned on (that is, when the game ball starts to win the first start winning port 13), data indicating “first” is stored. When the second start port switch 14a is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts and wins the second start winning port 14), data indicating "second" is set. For example, the CPU 56 sets 01 (H) as data indicating “first” when the first start port switch 13 a is turned on in the reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area), and the first 2 When the start port switch 14a is turned on, 02 (H) is set as data indicating “second”. In this case, when there is no corresponding reserved storage, 00 (H) is set in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 13, FIG. 13 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area). As shown in FIG. 13A, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total reserved memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area. FIG. 13A shows an example in which the value of the total pending storage number counter is 5. As shown in FIG. 13A, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total reserved memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area, and the first start winning opening 13 or the second start Data indicating “first” or “second” is set in the order of winning based on winning in the winning opening 14. Therefore, in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area), the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 is stored. Note that the reserved specific area is formed in the RAM 55. “Formed in RAM” means an area in the RAM.

  FIG. 13B is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a storage area (holding storage buffer) that stores a random number or the like corresponding to the holding storage. As shown in FIG. 13B, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer include a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, and a variation pattern type determination random number ( Random 2) and a random number for determining a variation pattern (random 3) are stored.

  Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of saving (storing) them in the save area in the first reserved storage buffer (S216). Specifically, in the process of S216, the big hit determination random number (random R), the big hit type determination random number (random 1), the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) Is saved (stored). With regard to the following description regarding the hold storage, it may be indicated as “hold stored” that the information related to the start winning as described above is stored in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer. It should be noted that the random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted and stored in the storage area in advance in the start-port switch passing process (when starting winning a prize), but is extracted at the start of variation of the first special symbol. May be. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes prize-winning effect processing for predetermining the fluctuation display result when the fluctuation based on the detected start winning is subsequently executed at the start winning (S217). Then, control for transmitting the first start winning designation command is performed (S218). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a winning determination result designation command for the first start winning to the effect controlling microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning determination in the winning effect process (S219).

  When transmitting an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the CPU 56 sets an address of a command transmission table (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command as a pointer. . Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set in the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in effect control command control processing (S29).

  In this embodiment, based on a winning determination result designation command for designating a determination result based on the start winning prize, the contents of the held storage data are determined before the variable display performed in accordance with the reserved storage is started. In some cases, a so-called pre-reading notice is given before the variable display is started, in which notification regarding the reserved storage data is performed. In the case of this embodiment, a reserved storage effect as shown in FIG. 9 is performed as a prefetch notice.

  If it is determined in S211 that the first start port switch is not in the ON state, if it is determined in S212 that the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value, or after S219 is executed, the CPU 56 2. It is confirmed whether or not the start port switch 14a is turned on (S221). If the second start port switch 14a is on, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second reserved memory for counting the second reserved memory number). Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4) (S222). If the value of the second reserved memory number counter is 4, the process is terminated. If the value of the second reserved memory number counter is 4, the CPU 56 may perform the process of confirming again whether or not the first start port switch 13a is on (see S211).

  If the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (S223). Further, the CPU 56 increases the value of the total pending storage number counter by 1 (S224). Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating “second” in an area corresponding to the value of the total reserved storage number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) (S225).

  Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing (storing) them in a storage area in the second reserved storage buffer (S226).

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a winning effect process as in S216 (S227). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second start winning designation command (S228). Further, the CPU 56 increases the value of the total pending storage number counter by 1 (S229). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a winning determination result designation command for the second start winning to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning determination in the winning effect process.

  In addition, you may implement | achieve the process of S213-219 and the process of S223-229 by one common routine. In that case, the CPU 56 first sets data indicating “first” when detecting that the first start port switch 13a is turned on, and indicates that the second start port switch 14a is turned on. When data is detected, data indicating “second” is set, and a common storage routine (first pending storage buffer or second pending storage buffer) is selected or started according to the set data in the common routine A winning designation command (first starting winning designation command or second starting winning designation command) is selected.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram showing, in a tabular form, an example of hold storage effect control using the configuration of the hold determination data storage area provided on the effect control microcomputer 100 side and information in the hold determination data storage area. In FIG. 14, (A) shows the configuration of the hold determination data storage area, and (B) shows an example of hold storage effect control using information in the hold determination data storage area.

  As shown in FIG. 14 (A), on the production control microcomputer 100 side, a hold determination data storage area for storing hold determination data, which is information that must be specified in order to perform a hold storage effect, is stored in the RAM. Is formed.

  In the hold determination data storage area of FIG. 14 (A), the hold storage specifying information storage of FIG. 13 (A) is based on the information that can specify the hold storage data such as the received winning determination result designation command and the start winning designation command. Retention target hold storage numbers 1 to 8 in the same order as the winning order stored in the area, the symbol type (information indicating which symbol type is the first special symbol or the second special symbol), jackpot determination result (probability change) Hold determination data indicating each information of big hit, sudden hit big hit, and deviation) and fluctuation pattern type (information showing any of normal fluctuation, normal reach, super reach, non-reach special, reach special) Is memorized. For example, as the information of the production target hold memory number number 1, the symbol type is “first” corresponding to the hold memory information “1” of the sum hold memory number counter of the hold memory specifying information storage area of FIG. On-hold determination data indicating information related to the on-hold storage of “1 special symbol”, the big hit determination result is “out of”, and the variation pattern type is “normal variation” is stored. Although illustration is omitted, since the determination value in the case of determining the big hit is specified by the winning determination result designation command, the data is also stored in the storage area corresponding to the production target hold storage number.

  In the data of the hold determination data storage area stored as described above, the data of the jackpot determination result is the jackpot determined based on the hold storage data read out when the variable display is executed in the game control microcomputer 560. The determination result matches the data content. In addition, in the data of the hold determination data storage area stored in this way, the data of the variation pattern type of the normal reach at the time of losing is the variable display start for the normal reach in S235 of the winning determination process of FIG. Sometimes, it is a type that is determined to be normal reach using the determination data of the range determined to be normal reach regardless of whether it is in the time-short state and whether or not the hold number reduction control is performed, so the variable display The variation pattern type determined on the basis of the stored storage data read when executing is consistent with the data contents. Further, the data of the variation pattern type of the super reach at the time of losing is, as shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17 described later, whether or not it is in a time-short state and whether or not the hold number reduction control is performed. Regardless, since the numerical data range that is determined to be the variation pattern type of super reach is the same, the variation pattern type and data content that are determined based on the stored storage data that is read when the variation display is executed Match. Note that the data of the fluctuation pattern type of the normal fluctuation at the time of deviation may change depending on whether or not the state is in a short time state and whether or not the hold number reduction control is performed at the start of the fluctuation display. However, the rate of change is small with respect to the entire data range for selecting the variation pattern type of normal variation, as will be apparent with reference to the allocation of variation pattern types in FIGS. 16 and 17 described later. Therefore, even if it is used as data for determining the effect mode when performing the hold storage effect as described later, the correspondence between the variation pattern and the effect mode selection is not impaired. The data in the hold determination data storage area is stored in the production target hold storage number “Every time a variable display based on the hold storage data corresponding to the hold determination data in the area corresponding to the play target hold storage number“ 1 ”is executed. The hold determination data of the area corresponding to “1” is erased, and the data contents of the areas corresponding to the other effect target hold storage numbers are shifted one by one to the area corresponding to the previous effect target hold storage number. .

  FIG. 14B shows an example of selection of effects for the 1R period and effects for the 2R period when the hold storage effect is performed, corresponding to the hold storage information shown in FIG. When the reserved memory effect is a jackpot gaming state with a probable big hit, the reserved memory information of the production target reserved memory number numbers 1 to 8 is held for 1R period within the range of the first to eighth rounds. One of the effect and the hold storage effect for the 2R period is selected and performed. When the number of hold memories when the hold memory effect is performed is 6, as an example, FIG. 14B shows the effect object hold memory of “1 to 3” among the effect object hold memory number numbers 1 to 6. The reserved memory effect for 1R period is assigned to the number number, the reserved memory effect for 2R period is assigned to the effect target hold memory number number of “4, 6”, and the effect target hold memory number number of “5” is assigned. The reserved memory effect corresponding to the number of reserved memories existing when the big hit gaming state is entered is executed in the first to seventh rounds in the big hit gaming state because the reserved memory effect is not allocated to An example is shown.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the winning effect processing in S217 and S227.
In the winning effect processing, the CPU 56 first determines the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in S217 and S227 and the jackpot determination value (in other words, the normal jackpot determination table shown in the left column of FIG. 8A). The probability change big hit determination table and the normal big hit determination table are compared with each other to check whether or not they match (S231). In this embodiment, at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol and the production symbol, whether or not to make a big hit in the special symbol normal processing to be described later, the big hit type is determined, or the variation pattern is determined in the variation pattern setting processing. In addition to this, at the timing when the game ball starts to win the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14, before the variable display based on the start winning starts, the effect at the time of winning By executing the process, it is determined which of the variation pattern types. By doing so, the variation pattern type is predicted in advance before the variation display of the effect symbol is executed, and, as will be described later, based on the determination result at the time of winning, during the winning game state By pre-reading the hold determination data based on the hold determination data in the hold determination data storage area of FIG. 14A stored according to the determination result at the time of winning by the process, the hold storage effect as shown in FIG. Is done.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not coincide with the normal big hit determination value (N in S231), the CPU 56 is set in S158 of FIG. 27 to be described later, and the probability variation indicating the number of times the special symbol can be varied in the probability variation state. Confirming the value of the number counter, and confirming whether there is pending storage information that has been determined to be a big hit to the pending storage information that is stored in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer. Thus, it is determined whether or not the latest jackpot determination of the stored storage is performed in the probability variation state (S231A). When the jackpot determination is performed in the probability change state, the CPU 56 determines whether the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in S216 and S226 and the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change shown in the right column of FIG. A judgment value other than the big hit judgment value (first big hit judgment value) (that is, the second big hit judgment value as the probability change big hit judgment value) is compared, and it is confirmed whether or not they match (S232). As described above, the jackpot judgment value at the time of probability change shown in the right column of FIG. 8A is unique to the jackpot judgment value common to the jackpot judgment value at the normal time shown in the left column of FIG. 8B. The jackpot judgment value is added. Therefore, in S231, the big hit judgment is performed with the normal big hit judgment value (first big hit judgment value) as the common big hit judgment value in the normal time and the probability change. The big hit determination is performed with the hourly big hit determination value (second big hit determination value). Thus, regardless of whether the gaming state is the normal state or the probability variation state, when the random R is a common jackpot determination value at the normal time and at the time of the probability variation, it matches the normal jackpot determination value at S231. It is determined. When the random R is a jackpot determination value unique to the probability change, it is determined in S232 that it matches the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change. Note that, as described above, the normal jackpot determination value and the probability variation jackpot determination value may not be properly used as the jackpot determination value used in the winning effect processing, but only the normal jackpot determination value may be used. In this way, the prefetching can be performed without determining whether or not the gaming state (whether it is a probable variation state) or not until the start of the variable display at the stage of prefetching in the winning effect processing. Thus, it is possible to prevent the reserved storage data that is determined to be a big hit at the stage of being turned into the stored storage data that is lost, and the content of the notice is not consistent with the actual change display.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not coincide with the probability change big hit determination value (N in S232), the process proceeds to S235.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches the jackpot determination value in S231 or S232 (when it is determined that the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot), the common jackpot determination value is used in the normal time and the probability change in S231. The type of big hit judgment value of the normal big hit judgment value (first big hit judgment value) and the probability change big hit judgment value (second big hit judgment value) as the unique big hit judgment value by the judgment of S232 Data indicating whether the big hit determination has been made is stored in the RAM 55 (S233). As described later, the data indicating which type of jackpot determination value is determined in the RAM 55 is stored in the RAM 55. As will be described later, which type of jackpot determination value is used is determined based on which type of jackpot determination value is determined. This is because, in order to notify the computer 100, it is used to transmit a command including the data as a winning determination result designation command.

  Then, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type based on the jackpot type determination random number (random 1) extracted in S216 and S226 (S234), and proceeds to S235.

  In S235, random 2 numerical data for determining the variation pattern type of the latest hold storage information stored in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer in S216 or S226, the display result, and the time reduction as described later. Processing for determining the variation pattern type corresponding to the range to which the numerical data of random 2 belongs, using the presence / absence of a state and a variation pattern determination table selected according to the gaming state such as the total number of pending storage Perform (S235).

  As will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 19, the distribution ratio of each variation pattern type with respect to the numerical data of random 2 is different depending on whether it is out of place or when it is a big hit, and it is in a short time state. It differs depending on when it is not in the time saving state, and further when it is less than the predetermined number and when it is greater than or equal to the predetermined number.

  For this reason, in S235, it is determined on the basis of the determination results in S231 and S232 whether the display is fluctuating when it is out of place or when it is a big hit. Further, in S235, the value of the short-time counter, which will be described later, is confirmed, and the stored information that has been determined to be a big hit to the stored information stored in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer. By checking whether or not there is, it is determined whether or not the change display is performed in a short time state for the latest start winning. Based on such a determination, in S235, when the latest stored information is a variable display when the probable big hit, a determination table (for example, a time reduction state and a time reduction state) If not, the determination table of FIG. 18A is selected, and if the time is short, the determination table of FIG. 18B is selected to determine the variation pattern type.

  Also, in S235, when the latest pending storage information is a variable display when it becomes out of date, a determination table for when the time-short state is not reached, according to the determination result of whether or not the time-short state is reached. A determination table (for example, the determination table in FIG. 16B) used when the hold number reduction control is performed is selected, and the variation pattern type is determined. On the other hand, a determination table (for example, FIG. 17) used when the hold number reduction control is performed among the determination tables when the time reduction state is entered, depending on the determination result of whether or not the time reduction state is established. The determination table (b) is selected to determine the variation pattern type.

  As described later, when a loss occurs, the determination table used in the case where the hold number reduction control is performed for each of the case where the time reduction state does not occur and the case where the time reduction state occurs is described later. The random 2 numerical data range for selecting the normal reach and super reach fluctuation patterns in the determination table when the hold number reduction control is not performed is the normal reach and super reach fluctuations in the determination table when the hold number reduction control is performed. Since a predetermined numerical data range is added to a random 2 numerical data range for selecting a pattern, if the variation pattern type is determined in the determination table when the hold number reduction control is performed, the winning pattern When it is determined that the variation pattern type of reach is determined in the production process, Whether or not the stored storage information determined in the outgoing processing is changed to the reach variation pattern type (reach type including the normal reach type and the super reach type) does not change regardless of the value of the stored storage number later. Therefore, the probability of whether or not the variation pattern type of reach in the determination in the winning effect process is improved. For example, the numerical data that is determined to be the normal reach variation pattern type according to the determination table when the hold number reduction control is performed in the effect process at the time of winning is the normal reach variation even in the determination table when the hold number reduction control is performed. Since it is set as numerical data that is determined to be a pattern type, it is always determined that the variation pattern type of normal reach is determined even when the variable pattern type is determined at the start of the variable display for the numerical data after the winning effect processing. Will be made. In addition, as described later, regarding the super-reach variation pattern type, the determination is made as the super-reach variation pattern type regardless of whether or not the state is a short-time state and whether or not the hold number reduction control is performed. Since the numerical data range to be processed is the same, the certainty of whether or not the variation pattern type of the super reach in the determination in the winning effect process is 100%.

  Then, the CPU 56 is the winning determination result of either the first reserved memory or the second reserved memory based on the determination results in S231 to S232, S234, S235 and the data stored in S233. In addition to specifying the hit, disagreement, jackpot type, and variation pattern type information, and if it is determined to be a big hit, the first big hit judgment value (normal big hit judgment value) and the second big hit Processing to set data (command data) for transmitting a winning judgment result specifying command for designating a winning judgment result including information indicating whether the big hit is judged based on a judgment value (probability jackpot judgment value) (S235). As a result, a winning determination result designation command is transmitted. Note that the information related to the jackpot type and the information related to the variation pattern type may be transmitted separately using different commands instead of the same winning determination result specifying command.

  Next, a variation pattern table used to select and determine the variation pattern of the special symbol and the effect symbol in the game control microcomputer 560 will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 19 are diagrams showing the data tables used for determining the variation pattern in a tabular format.

  FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram showing a first determination table when the non-time-short state is off and a second determination table when the non-time-short state is off. FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram showing a first determination table when the time-short state is off and a second determination table when the time-short state is off. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram showing a non-short-time state probable big hit determination table and a short-time state probable big hit determination table. FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram showing a non-short-time state sudden hit / hit determination table and a short-time state sudden hit / hit determination table.

  Each of the determination tables of FIGS. 16 to 19 is stored in the ROM 54, is selected according to the gaming state, and is used to determine (determine) the variation pattern type and variation pattern.

  Each of the determination tables shown in FIGS. 16 to 19 includes a variation pattern type determination table indicating the relationship between the random 2 and the variation pattern type, and a variation indicating the relationship between the random 3 and the variation pattern belonging to each type for each variation pattern type. Pattern determination table.

  In the variation pattern column in each table of FIGS. 16 to 19, “normal reach” indicates a variation pattern of normal reach. “First normal reach” (20 seconds) and “second normal reach” (20 seconds) have different backgrounds during variable display. “Super Reach” indicates a variation pattern for performing a reach effect in which a special effect image is displayed when the reach state is reached.

  The “first super reach” (40 seconds) is a variation pattern of the super reach that performs the reach effect using the first special effect image. As the first special effect image, a first special character effect using the first special character is performed. “Second super reach” (40 seconds) is a variation pattern of super reach in which a reach effect using the second special effect image is performed. As the second special effect image, a second special character effect using the second special character is performed. “Third super reach” (40 seconds) is a super reach variation pattern in which a reach effect using a third special effect image is performed. As the third special effect image, a third special character effect using the third special character is performed.

  Each of the “first non-reach special” and the “second non-reach special” is a special variation pattern that displays a chance pattern as a combination of sudden hits without displaying a combination of reach symbols during variation display. It is. Each of “First Reach Special”, “Second Reach Special”, and “Third Reach Special” is displayed as a combination of reach symbols once during the variable display, and finally the symbols are replaced. It is a special variation pattern that displays a chance as a combination of jackpot symbols. Each of “first reach special” to “third reach special” is a variation pattern in which an effect using a specific background image that differs for each variation pattern is performed.

  “First non-reach special” (10 seconds) and “second non-reach special” (10 seconds) are fluctuation patterns included in the non-reach special fluctuation pattern type for probability variation big hits, and “first normal reach” and “ Fluctuation time is shorter than “second normal reach”. Further, “first reach special” (15 seconds), “second reach special” (15 seconds), and “third reach special” (15 seconds) are fluctuations included in the reach fluctuation pattern type for sudden hits. For example, the variation time is shorter than that of “first super reach” to “seventh super reach”. Further, the “first non-reach special” and the “second non-reach special” have a shorter variation time than the “first reach special”, the “second reach special”, and the “third reach special”.

  Note that, as the variation pattern for the sudden hit big hit, a variation pattern common to the big hit type variation pattern other than the sudden hit big hit may be used.

  Further, as described above, “super reach” is a variation pattern in which the ratio selected when a big hit is higher than that of “normal reach” is high, and the reliability of the big hit is high.

  “Out of” is a variation pattern in which the final display result of the variation display is a “out of” display result. “Probability variation jackpot” is a variation pattern in which the final display result of the variation display becomes the display result of “probability variation big hit”. The “accuracy big hit” is a fluctuation pattern in which the final display result of the fluctuation display is the display result of “accuracy big hit”.

  Based on these pieces of information, for example, it is indicated that the variation pattern of “first super-reach deviation” is “the variation pattern of the first super-reach resulting in a loss display result”.

  In the tables of FIG. 16 to FIG. 19, the fields described as “Random 2 range” and “Variation pattern type” are the fluctuation pattern type determination table section indicating the relationship between “Random 2 range” and “Variation pattern type”. It is a column which shows the function as. For example, taking FIG. 16 (a) as an example, there are a plurality of random 2 (1-251) values for each of a plurality of variation pattern types such as “normal”, “normal reach”, and “super reach”. It is divided into numerical ranges. For example, when the random 2 value extracted at a predetermined timing matches any numerical value in the numerical range of 230 to 251, it is determined that the variation pattern type is “super reach”.

  In each of the tables of FIGS. 16 to 19, “random 3 range” and “variation pattern” are described in a variation pattern determination table indicating the relationship between “random 3 range” and “variation pattern”. It is a column showing the function as a part. The variation patterns shown corresponding to each type of variation pattern type determination table are variation patterns belonging to each type. For example, taking FIG. 16A as an example, the variation patterns belonging to the type of “normal reach” are “first normal reach miss” and “second normal reach B miss”. All values of random 3 (0 to 99) are assigned to a plurality of numerical ranges in each of a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to each variation pattern type. For example, when it is determined that the variation pattern type of “super-reach” is set, “first super-reach out”, “second super-reach out”, according to the random 3 value extracted at a predetermined timing, And the variation pattern is selected and determined from “out of third super reach”.

  When the variation display result is out of sync in the non-short-time state, the determination table is selected as follows in order to determine the variation pattern.

  In the non-temporary state, when the total number of reserved memories is 1 or 2 due to the start winning, the non-temporal state of FIG. 16 (a) is displayed when the variable display result is off for the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The first determination table at the time of disconnection is selected. On the other hand, in the time-saving state, when the total number of pending storage becomes 3 to 8 due to the start winning, the second determination table is selected when the non-time-saving state in FIG. In the time-saving state, when the total number of pending storage becomes 1 due to the start winning, when the variable display result for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is lost, the time-saving state in FIG. Select a judgment table. On the other hand, in the time-saving state, when the total pending storage number becomes any of 2 to 8 due to the start winning, the second determination table is selected when the time-shortening state in FIG.

  In the non-time-short state out-of-time first determination table of FIG. 16A, the relationship between “random 2 range” and “variation pattern type” is set at the ratio shown in FIG. In the non-time-short state out-of-time second determination table of FIG. 16B, the relationship between “random 2 range” and “variation pattern type” is set at the ratio shown in FIG. 16B. In the first determination table at the time-short state deviation of FIG. 17A, the relationship between “random 2 range” and “variation pattern type” is set at the ratio shown in FIG. In the second determination table at the time shortage state deviation in FIG. 17B, the relationship between the “random 2 range” and the “variation pattern type” is set at the ratio shown in FIG.

  In the non-short-time state probability variable big hit determination table of FIG. 18A, the relationship between “random 2 range” and “variation pattern type” is set at the ratio shown in FIG. In the time-short state probability variation big hit determination table of FIG. 18B, the relationship between “random 2 range” and “variation pattern type” is set at the ratio shown in FIG. 18B. In the non-short-time state sudden hit / hit determination table of FIG. 19A, the relationship between “random 2 range” and “variation pattern type” is set at the ratio shown in FIG. 19A. In the time-short state abrupt big hit determination table of FIG. 19B, the relationship between “random 2 range” and “variation pattern type” is set at the ratio shown in FIG. 19B.

  As shown in FIG. 16, when it is determined to be shifted in the non-time-saving state, if the total number of reserved memories is 1 or 2, the number of reserved memories at the time of determining the variation pattern is any of 3 to 8 Compared to, a higher percentage of normal fluctuations (non-reach fluctuations) and a lower percentage of reach fluctuations (including normal reach fluctuations and super-reach fluctuations) that are longer than normal fluctuations, Data is set in the first determination table at the time of non-time reduction state and the second determination table at the time of non-time reduction state in FIG.

  The non-time-short state out-of-time first determination table in FIG. 16A is used when the number of reserved memories at the time of determining a variation pattern is 1 or 2 for a special symbol for which variation display is started. In the case of the present embodiment, after the execution condition of the variable display is satisfied, the data of the total pending storage number counter that counts the total pending storage number at the time of the big hit determination process is subtracted, but as will be described later, Since the data of the total pending storage number when the execution condition is satisfied is stored until the variation pattern is determined after the big hit determination, separately from the total pending storage number counter, the data of the total pending storage number is used when determining the variation pattern. It is done.

  The non-time-short state out-of-time second determination table in FIG. 16B is used when the number of reserved memories at the time of determining a variation pattern is any of 3 to 8 for a special symbol for starting variation display. For example, if the symbol for starting the variable display is the first special symbol, the second determination table when the non-time-short state is out of state is when the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol at the time of determining the variation pattern is any of 3 to 8 On the other hand, if the symbol for starting the variable display is the second special symbol, the symbol is used when the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol at the time of determining the variation pattern is any of 3-8.

  As a result, in the non-time-short state, the rate at which the fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation display is selected is increased based on the increase in the number of reserved memories. Is done.

  When the variation display result is out of order in the short time state, the determination table is selected as follows in order to determine the variation pattern.

  In the time-saving state, when the variable display result for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is lost, if the total number of pending storage is 1, the time-determined state first judgment table in FIG. 17A is selected. To do. On the other hand, when the variable display result is lost for the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the time reduction state, if the total number of pending storage is 2 to 8, the time reduction state of FIG. The second determination table is selected.

  The ratio determined in the normal variation (non-reach deviation variation) in the first determination table at the time short-time state deviation in FIG. 17A as compared with the first determination table in the non-time short-time state in FIG. 16A. The data is set so that the ratio determined by the reach fluctuation (including the normal reach fluctuation and the super reach fluctuation) is high. As a result, when the total number of pending storages is 1 or 2, the rate at which the variation pattern with a short variation time is selected is higher in the time reduction state than in the non-time reduction state. In some cases, the change display is performed with an average shorter change time than in the non-time-short state.

  In the second determination table at the time short-time state deviation in FIG. 17B, the second determination table at the non-time short-time state in FIG. 16B and the first determination table at the time short-time state deviation in FIG. 17B. The data is set so that the ratio determined as normal fluctuation (non-reach fluctuation) is low and the ratio determined as reach fluctuation (including normal reach fluctuation and super reach fluctuation) is high.

  As a result, when the total pending storage number is any one of 3 to 8, the rate of selection of a variation pattern with a short variation time is higher in the time reduction state than in the non-time reduction state. In the time reduction state, the change display is performed with a change time shorter on average on average than in the non-time reduction state. Furthermore, as described above, even when the total number of pending storages is 1 or 2, the variable display is performed with an average shorter short variation time in the time reduction state than in the non-time reduction state. Therefore, in the short time state, the game state is controlled to have a shorter variation time than in the non-short time state.

  Also, in the short-time state, when the total number of pending storages is any of 2 to 8, the rate of selection of a variation pattern with a short variation time is higher than when the total number of pending storages is 1. When the number of memories is large, the variable display is performed with a long variation time on average than when the number of reserved memories is small. As a result, in the non-time-short state, the rate at which the fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation display is selected is increased based on the increase in the number of reserved memories. Is done.

  In the short-time state, by controlling the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation to be shorter than that in the non-short-time state, the game state may be controlled to have a shorter fluctuation time than the non-short-time state. Good. Similarly, in the hold number reduction control state, the change time is shorter than the non-hold number reduction control state by controlling the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation to be shorter than the non-hold number reduction control state. The game state may be controlled.

  Also, in the determination tables shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 that are selected when there is a loss, the super reach is selected in a high / low relationship such that the first super reach> the second super reach> the third super reach. Data is set in.

  When the fluctuation display result is a probable big hit in the non-short-time state, the non-short-time state probable big hit determination table of FIG. 18A is selected in order to determine the fluctuation pattern. Further, when the fluctuation display result is a probability variation big hit in the short-time state, the time-short state certain variation big hit judgment table of FIG. 18B is selected in order to determine the variation pattern.

  Further, in each of the non-short-time state probable big hit determination table of FIG. 18A and the short-time state probable big hit determination table of FIG. 18B, FIG. 16 and FIG. Compared with the determination table of FIG. 17, the data is set so that the ratio determined for “super reach fluctuation” is higher than the ratio determined for “normal reach fluctuation”. As a result, when the 9R big hit, which is a probable big hit, is compared to the case of a loss, the ratio of super reach in the variable display becomes higher.

  In addition, in the second determination table for the short-time state probability variation big hit in FIG. 18B, the ratio determined to the normal reach fluctuation is higher than the first determination table for the non-short-time state certain variation big hit in FIG. 18A. The data is set so that the ratio determined by reach fluctuation is high. As a result, in the time-short state, the ratio of the super-reach in the variable display when the probability variation big hit is higher than in the non-time-short state.

  In addition, the determination table of FIG. 18 selected when the probability variation big hit is different from the determination tables of FIG. 16 and FIG. 17 selected when the loss occurs, the third super reach> the second super reach> the first. The data is set so that it is selected based on the level relationship such as super reach. Thus, for example, when the third super reach is executed, the ratio of probability variation big hit is higher than when the second super reach is executed, and when the second super reach is executed, the first super reach is executed. It is possible for the player to recognize that the rate of probability variation jackpots is higher than when is executed. Thereby, a player's expectation can be raised by the effect aspect when the effect of a super reach is performed, and the interest of a game can be improved. It should be noted that the determination table data may be set so that the selection ratio for each effect is the same for the super reach when the loss occurs and when the probability variation is a big hit.

  For each of the first and second special symbols, when the fluctuation display result is a sudden big hit in the non-short-time state, the non-short-time state sudden big hit judgment table of FIG. 19A is selected in order to determine the fluctuation pattern. . In addition, for each of the first and second special symbols, when the fluctuation display result is a sudden big hit in the short time state, the short time sudden big hit judgment table of FIG. 19B is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. .

  Compared with the non-time-short state sudden hit / hit determination table in FIG. 19 (a), the non-reach special variation is determined to be higher in the time-short state sudden hit / hit determination table in FIG. The data is set so that the rate at which data is transmitted is low. As a result, the ratio of non-reach special fluctuation patterns with shorter fluctuation times is higher in the short-time state than in the non-time-short state, so the time-short state is more likely to be selected than the non-time-short state. However, since the fluctuation display is performed with a short fluctuation time on average, in the short time state, the game state is controlled to have a short fluctuation time as compared with the non-short time state.

  Further, in the determination table of FIG. 19 that is selected when the hit is a big hit, the selection ratio of the reach special variation pattern has a high / low relationship such that the third reach special> second reach special> first reach special. Data is set to be selected. As a result, for example, when the third reach special variation pattern is executed, the rate of sudden hit is higher than when the second reach special variation pattern is executed, and the second reach special variation pattern. Is executed, it is possible for the player to recognize that the ratio of the sudden hit is higher than when the first reach special variation pattern is executed. Thereby, a player's expectation can be raised by the effect mode when the reach variation pattern is executed, and the interest of the game can be improved. It should be noted that the data of the determination table is set so that the selection ratios of the first reach special, the second reach special, and the third reach special are the same between the sudden big hit and the small hit. It may be set.

  In the determination tables of FIGS. 16 to 18 described above, the first to third super reach are set as one super reach type. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first to third super reach types include the type of super reach that performs an effect using a character, the type of super reach that performs a super reach effect after a pseudo-continuous effect, and the development effect of the reach effect. May be set in a plurality of types, such as a super-reach type that is undeveloped and a super-reach type that develops a reach production.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the special symbol normal process (S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total number of reserved storage (S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0, the process is terminated.

  If the total number of pending storage is not 0, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the first data among the data set in the pending specific area (see FIG. 26A) is “first” data. (Step S52). If it is data indicating “first”, a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol) is set to “first”. 1 "is set (step S54). If it is not data indicating “first”, that is, if it is data indicating “second”, data indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer (step S53).

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of S52 to S54, the variation display based on the previously stored data among the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol. It is executed in order. In this way, in this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are processed according to the order in which the stored memory information is won, so that the variable display according to the order of winning is displayed. Will be executed.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storages = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 determines each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory buffer. Read out and store in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory buffer. Store in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 and stores each storage area in the first reserved memory buffer. Shift content. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory buffer are shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 stores the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 55. Each stored random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 55. The random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 in order.

  Then, the CPU 56 saves the count value of the total pending storage number counter as a total pending storage number data for determining the variation pattern in a predetermined area of the RAM 55 (S57), and then decreases the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (S58). In this way, by storing the value of the summation pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in S57, the summation pending memory number data used when determining the variation pattern is used for executing the special symbol normal processing. Accordingly, the total pending storage number before the count is decremented by 1 in S58, that is, the total pending storage number when the execution condition of the variable display is satisfied is used.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first start winning opening 13, that is, “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first special symbol. ”Or“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second special symbol, that is,“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second start winning opening 14. Data is set in the special symbol pointer. In the subsequent processing in the special symbol process, processing corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the process of S300-S307 can be made common by the case where the 1st special symbol is made object and the case where the 2nd special symbol is made object.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads the random R (random number for jackpot determination) from the random number buffer area and executes the jackpot determination module to determine the jackpot (S60). In the jackpot determination module executed in S60, the CPU 56 extracts the random R which is extracted in S216 or S226 of the start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold memory buffer or the second hold memory buffer, and a predetermined jackpot. This is a program that compares a judgment value (see FIG. 7) and executes a process of determining that it is a big hit if they match. In other words, the jackpot determination module is a program that executes processing for determining a jackpot.

  The jackpot determination process is configured such that when the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability state), the probability of a big hit is higher than when the gaming state is a non-probability change state (normal game state and short-time state). ing. Specifically, a jackpot determination table at the time of probability change in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance (a table in which the values on the right side of FIG. 8A in the ROM 54 are set) and the number of jackpot determination values are variable. A normal big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the left side of FIG. 8A in the ROM 54 are set) set smaller than the hour big hit determination table is provided. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state. When the gaming state is a probability variation state, the CPU 56 performs a jackpot determination process using the probability variation jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is not determined. When it is in the probability variation state, the big hit determination process is performed using the normal big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 8A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a big hit. If it is determined to be a big hit in S60, the process proceeds to S71. Note that deciding whether to win or not is to decide whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but to decide whether or not to stop the special symbol display as a big hit symbol. But there is.

  Note that whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation state is determined by whether or not the probability variation flag is set. The probability variation flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state, and is reset when the probability variation state is terminated. Specifically, it is determined to be a promising big hit or a sudden big hit, and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. When the big hit is decided, the special symbol variation display is terminated and the stop symbol is stopped and displayed. To reset.

  If the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in S60), the process proceeds to S75 described later. That is, if it is out of place, the process proceeds to S75 as it is.

  If the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches any one of the jackpot determination values, the CPU 56 sets a jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot (S71). Then, the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used to determine the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 selects the big hit type determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG.

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the selected jackpot type determination table to select the type corresponding to the value of the random number (random 1) for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area (“probability change jackpot”, or “Accuracy big hit”) is determined as the type of big hit (S73). In this case, the CPU 56 reads the jackpot type determination random number (random 1) extracted in S216 or S226 of the start port passing process and stored in the first hold memory buffer or the second hold memory buffer, and selects the selected jackpot type. The jackpot type is determined using the determination table. Further, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, the ratio of selecting an abrupt big hit is high.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (S74). For example, when the jackpot type is “probability big hit”, “01” is set as data indicating the jackpot type. When the big hit type is “surprise big hit”, “02” is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol using the jackpot type determination table selected in S72 (S75). Specifically, when the big hit flag is not set, “−” as a special symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol. When the big hit flag is set, either “5” or “7”, which is a big hit symbol, is determined as a special symbol stop symbol according to the determination result of the big hit type. That is, when the big hit type is determined to be “surprise big hit”, “5” is determined as the special symbol stop symbol. If “probable big hit” is determined, “7” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S301) (S76).

  Note that the process for determining the jackpot as described above is not limited to the case where it is performed before the start of the execution of the fluctuation display, but may be at least the timing until the display result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol is derived.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (S91). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 determines the variation pattern type according to the big hit type information stored in S74 and the short time information indicating which state is the non-short time state or the short time state. And as a table used to determine the fluctuation pattern, based on the selection conditions of the determination table described above, non-short-time state probability variation big hit judgment table, short-time state probability variation big hit judgment table, non-short time state sudden variation big hit judgment table, And any one is selected from the time-short state sudden probability big hit determination table (S92). Then, the process proceeds to S104.

  Here, the time reduction information is information indicating whether or not the time reduction state is set based on whether or not the time reduction flag is set. When the time reduction flag is set, the time reduction information indicates the time reduction state. When the flag is not set, it indicates a non-time-short state.

  When the big hit flag is not set in S91, the CPU 56 confirms the time reduction information indicating whether or not the time reduction flag indicating the time reduction state is set (S95). The time reduction flag is set when the gaming state shifts to the time reduction state (including the time of transition to the probability change state), and is reset when the time reduction state ends. Specifically, it is set in the process of ending the big hit game when it is decided to be a probable big hit or suddenly a promising big hit, and a special symbol when it is decided that the time is reduced or a big hit The display is reset at the timing when the change display is finished and the stop symbol is stopped and displayed. If the time reduction flag is set (Y in S95), the CPU 56 proceeds to S99.

  If the time flag is not set (N in S95), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (S96). If the total number of pending storages is less than 3 (N in S96), the CPU 56 selects the first determination table when the non-short-time state is out of FIG. 16A as the table for determining the variation pattern (S97). Then, the process proceeds to S104. On the other hand, if the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Y in S96), the CPU 56 selects the second determination table at the time of non-short-time state deviation shown in FIG. 16B as a table for determining the variation pattern (S98). . Then, the process proceeds to S104.

  In the non-time-short state deviation second determination table, the selection ratio of the normal variation pattern (non-reach variation pattern) having a short variation time is set higher than that of the non-time-short state deviation first determination table. Thereby, when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more in the non-time-short state, the average fluctuation time can be shortened as compared with the case where it is less than 3. In this way, by shortening the average fluctuation time as the total number of pending storage increases, it is possible to prevent the situation where the fluctuation display operating rate is reduced as much as possible. By shortening the average fluctuation time in this way, fluctuation reduction control can be realized.

  When the time reduction flag is set in S95 (Y in S95), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total pending storage number is 2 or more (S99). If the total number of pending storages is less than 2 (N in S99), the CPU 56 selects the first determination table at the time-short state deviation shown in FIG. 17A as a table for determining the variation pattern (S99). Then, the process proceeds to S104. On the other hand, if the total number of pending storages is 2 or more (Y in S99), the CPU 56 selects the second determination table at the time-short state deviation shown in FIG. 17B as a table for determining the variation pattern (S100). Then, the process proceeds to S104.

  In the second determination table at the time-short state deviation time, the selection ratio of the normal variation pattern (non-reach variation pattern) having a short variation time is set higher than that of the first determination table at the time-loss state deviation time. Thereby, when the total number of pending storages is 2 or more in the short time state, the average fluctuation time can be shortened as compared with the case where it is less than 2. In this way, by shortening the average fluctuation time as the total number of pending storage increases, it is possible to prevent the situation where the fluctuation display operating rate is reduced as much as possible. By shortening the average fluctuation time in this way, fluctuation reduction control can be realized.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads random 2 (random number for variation pattern type determination) from the random number buffer area (first reserved storage buffer or second reserved storage buffer), and selects it by the processing of S92, S94, S97, S97A, S98 or S100. The variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the data in the variation pattern type determination table section in the determination table (S104).

  Next, the CPU 56 reads the random number 3 (random number for variation pattern determination) from the random number buffer area (the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer), and selects it in the process of S92, S94, S97, S97A, S98 or S100. By referring to the data in the variation pattern determination table section in the determination table, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types (S105).

  Next, an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined variation pattern is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S106).

  Also, the special symbol change is started (S107). For example, the start flag corresponding to the special symbol referred to in the special symbol display control process of S33 is set. Further, a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (S108). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (S302) (S109).

  In the case where it is determined to be out of place, instead of suddenly determining the variation pattern type, first, it may be determined whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a random number for reach determination. Then, based on the determination result as to whether or not to reach, the processing of S95 to S100 and S104 may be executed to determine the variation pattern type. In this case, a variation pattern type determination table for non-reach and a variation pattern type determination table for reach are prepared in advance, and one of the variation pattern type determination tables is selected based on the reach determination result, The variation pattern type may be determined.

  In addition, when determining whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a reach determination random number, depending on the total reserved memory number (which may be the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number), Reach determination tables having different selection ratios may be selected, and it may be determined whether or not the reach is set so that the reach probability decreases as the number of reserved memories increases.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the display result designation command transmission process (S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit an effect control command (see FIG. 10) of any one of the display result 1 designation to the display result 3 designation in accordance with the determined jackpot type or deviation. Do. Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (S110). If not set, the process proceeds to S114. When the big hit flag is set, if the big hit type is a probable big hit, control is performed to transmit a display result 2 designation command (S111, S112). Whether or not it is a probable big hit can be determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in S74 of the special symbol normal process is “01” (S111). When the big hit type is not a probable big hit, control is performed to send a display result 3 designation command in response to the fact that it is a sudden big hit in accordance with the erasing method and is a sudden big hit (S111, S113). When it is determined in S111 that it is not a probable big hit, it is determined whether or not it is a sudden big hit by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer is “02” in S74, Based on the determination result, control for transmitting the display result 3 designation command may be performed.

  Further, when the big hit flag is not set (N of S110), that is, when it is out of place, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 1 designation command (S114).

  Thus, a display result designation command for designating the set small hit or miss is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in S28 of FIG.

  After S112, S113, and S114, control is performed to transmit a pending storage subtraction designation command designating that the total pending storage number is decremented by 1 (S115). Instead of transmitting the pending storage subtraction designation command, a total pending storage number designation command for designating the total pending storage number after subtraction may be transmitted. Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (S303) (S116).

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (S125), and when the variable time timer times out (S126), the value of the special symbol process flag is set to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (S304). Update (S127). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (S304) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol display control process of S32 to end the variation of the special symbol, and the first special symbol display unit 8a or the second special symbol display unit 8b Control for deriving and displaying the stop symbol is performed (S131). If data indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is terminated, and “second” is indicated in the special symbol pointer. When data is set, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is terminated. Further, control for transmitting a symbol confirmation designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed (S132). When the big hit flag is not set (S133N), the process proceeds to S141.

  When the big hit flag is set (S133Y), the CPU 56 resets the probability variation flag and the hourly flag (S134), and performs control for transmitting the big hit start designation command or the sudden hit start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Perform (S135). Specifically, when the type of jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot, a jackpot start designation command is transmitted. When the big hit type is a sudden big hit, a sudden big hit start designation command is transmitted. Whether the big hit type is a probability big hit or a sudden big hit is determined based on the data indicating the big hit type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the big hit type buffer).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a normal state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S135A).

  Further, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (for example, the time for notifying that the big hit has occurred in the effect display device 9) is set in the big winning opening control timer (S136). Thereafter, in the pre-opening process for the big winning opening, the big winning opening control timer is decremented by 1, and when it becomes 0, the big winning opening is opened and a round is started.

  Further, according to the jackpot type specified by the data indicating the jackpot type stored in the RAM 55, the release pattern data stored in the ROM 54 is referred to, and the number of times of opening (for example, in the case of a probable big hit) 9 times, 2 times in case of rushing big hit), opening time (for example, 29 seconds in case of probability variation big hit, 0.5 seconds in case of rushing big hit), interval time between rounds (eg, probable big hit) In this case, data indicating the release mode such as 5 seconds is set in a predetermined storage area (S137). Among such data, the data of the number of times of opening is set in the number of times of opening counter for counting the number of times of opening. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening pre-processing (S305) (S138).

  If the number of rounds is the same for both the probable big hit and the sudden big hit, a fixed value (for example, 9 times) may be used as the data for the number of open times set in S137. The process for setting the number of times can be simplified.

  In S141, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is set (S141). When the time reduction flag is not set, the process proceeds to S146 described later. On the other hand, if the time reduction flag is set, the value of the time reduction counter indicating the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the time reduction state is decremented by 1 (S142). It is to be noted that control for transmitting a time reduction number designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed based on the value of the time reduction number counter after the subtraction, and the production control display device 9 displays the remaining number of time reductions on the production control microcomputer 100 side. You may make it display with.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the time reduction counter has become 0 (S143). If the value of the time reduction counter has not become 0, the process proceeds to S146 described later. On the other hand, when the value of the time reduction counter reaches 0, the time reduction flag is reset (S144). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a normal state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S145).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not a probability variation flag indicating that the probability variation state is set (S146). If the probability variation flag is not set, the process proceeds to S151 described later. On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is set, the value of the probability variation counter indicating the number of possible changes of the special symbol in the probability variation state is decremented by 1 (S147). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the probability variation counter is 0 (S148). If the value of the probability variation counter is not 0, the process proceeds to S151 described later. On the other hand, when the value of the probability variation counter becomes 0, the probability variation flag is reset (S149). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a time reduction state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S150), and proceeds to S151. In the case of this embodiment, the probability change state ends with 8 fluctuation displays after the big hit gaming state ends, and the short time state ends with the fluctuation display 20 times after the big hit gaming state ends. For this reason, the fluctuation display after the end of the big hit gaming state is the non-probable change state and the short time state from the ninth to the twentieth display. A time reduction state designation command is transmitted as a command for designating such an indeterminate state and a time reduction state. In S151, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (Step S300) (Step S151).

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening opening pre-processing (S305) in the special symbol process. In the pre-opening process for the big winning opening, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the big winning opening control timer by 1 (S401). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (S402). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0, the process is terminated. As a result, at the start of the big hit gaming state, the big hit display time set as described above is reached until the value of the big prize opening control timer becomes zero, so control for notifying that a big hit has occurred is performed. It is. In addition, during the rounds in the big hit gaming state, the interval time set in S440, which will be described later, is used until the value of the big prize opening control timer becomes 0. Done.

  When the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0, the CPU 56 designates the big prize opening opening designation command (A1XX) for designating the display state according to the number of rounds during the opening of the big prize opening (during round). (H)) is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (S403). The CPU 56 recognizes the number of rounds by checking the value of the number-of-releases counter for counting the number of rounds in the big hit game. Then, the CPU 56 controls the solenoid 21 to open to open the special winning opening (special variable winning ball apparatus 20) (S404), and decrements the value of the opening number counter by -1 (S405).

  In addition, the value corresponding to the opening time of the round based on the opening pattern data corresponding to the type of jackpot is set in the winning prize control timer as a value corresponding to the maximum time that the winning prize opening can be opened in each round. (S406). As the opening time of the round, the opening time data set in S137 is set. For example, the release time is set to 29 seconds in the case of a probable big hit, and the release time is set to 0.5 seconds in the case of a sudden big hit. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening process (S306) (S407).

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening opening process (S306) in the special symbol process. In the special prize opening opening process, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the special prize opening control timer by 1 (S420).

  Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the special winning opening control timer has become 0 (S421). When the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0, it is confirmed whether or not the count switch 23 is turned on (S432). If the count switch 23 is not turned on, the process is terminated. When the count switch 23 is turned on, the value of the winning number counter for counting the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening is incremented by one (S433). Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (S434). If the value of the winning number counter is not a predetermined number, the process is terminated. Note that the determination order of S421 and S432 may be reversed.

  When the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 or when the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number, the CPU 56 performs a control to drive the solenoid 21 and close the big prize opening (S435). ). Then, the value of the winning number counter is cleared (set to 0) (S436).

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the opening number counter (S438). When the value of the number-of-opening counter is not 0, the CPU 56 designates the post-big prize opening after-opening designation command (A2XX (H)) for designating the display state according to the number of rounds after the big prize opening is opened (after the round is completed). ) Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (S439). Then, a value corresponding to the interval time from the end of the round to the start of the next round is set in the big prize opening control timer (S440). Specifically, the interval time data set in S137 is set as the interval time. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for the special winning opening (S305) (S441).

  On the other hand, when the value of the number-of-releases counter is 0, the CPU 56 performs control for transmitting a jackpot end designation command corresponding to the jackpot type to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S442). Specifically, in S442, the jackpot type is confirmed based on the data indicating the jackpot type set in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55. Then, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to a jackpot end time (for example, a time for performing an effect informing the effect display device 9 that the jackpot game has ended) in the big prize opening control timer (S443), and a special symbol process. The value of the flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end process (S307) (S444), and the process ends.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (S307) in the special symbol process. In the big hit end process, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the big winning opening control timer in which the big hit end time is set (S154). Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the big prize winning control timer is 0 (whether or not the big hit end time has elapsed) (S155). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0, the process is terminated. If the value of the big prize winning control timer is 0, the big hit flag is reset (S156) and the probability variation flag is set (S157). As a result, after the big hit gaming state is finished, the gaming state shifts to the probability changing state. Then, “8” is set in the probability variation counter (S158). Thereby, after the end of the big hit gaming state of the probability change big hit and the sudden hit big hit, it is controlled to the probability change state continuously for a period until the variable display is executed eight times.

  Next, a time reduction flag is set (S159). Then, for example, “20” is set in the time-count counter (S160). Thereby, after the end of the big hit gaming state of the probability variation big hit and the sudden hit big hit, the period until the fluctuation display is executed 20 times is continuously controlled to the short time state. Next, the CPU 56 performs a process for transmitting a probability change state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S161). As a result, the probability change state designation command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, during the period in which the probability variation state is set, the time variation state is also established. Therefore, the probability variation state designation command designates the time variation state in addition to designating the probability variation state. Next, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S300) (S162), and ends the process.

  As described above, when the time-short state is entered, the time-short state designation command is transmitted, whereby the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the time-short state is established.

  Next, the normal symbol display result determination table used for determining the display result of the normal symbol will be described. FIG. 28 is an explanatory diagram of a normal symbol display result determination table. The normal symbol display result determination table is stored in the ROM 54.

  In the normal symbol display result determination table, the random 4 (1-201) value (determined value) for normal symbol determination, the normal symbol display result, the normal symbol variation time, and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 ( The relationship between the opening time and the number of times of opening of the second start winning opening 14) is shown separately for a normal gaming state (a gaming state in which the electric chew support control is not performed) and an electric chew support control state.

  In the normal gaming state, when the determined value is any of 1 to 20, the display result of the normal symbol is taken as a hit, the variation time is set to 10 seconds, and the release time is once in 0.3 seconds. Set to open. On the other hand, when the determined value is any of 21 to 201 in the normal gaming state, the display result of the normal symbol is disregarded, and the variation time is set to 10 seconds.

  In addition, when the determined value is any of 1 to 180 in the electric chew support control state, the display result of the normal symbol is taken as a hit, the variation time is set to 1 second, and the release time is 1.5. Set to open 3 times per second. On the other hand, when the determined value is any of 181 to 201 in the electric chew support control state, the display result of the normal symbol is disregarded, and the variation time is set to 1 second.

  Thus, regarding the control of the normal symbol, in the electric chew support control state, compared with the normal gaming state, the determined value is set to be higher, the variation time is set to be shorter, Further, the opening time and the number of opening times are set to increase.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal symbol process executed in S27 of FIG. In this normal symbol process, the CPU 56 first checks whether the detection signal from the gate switch 32a provided in the gate 32 is in an on state, thereby detecting whether a game ball that has passed through the gate 32 has been detected. It is determined whether or not (S501). In S501, when the game ball passes through the gate 32 and the detection signal from the gate switch 32a is turned on for a predetermined period, it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate (passed ball), Processing at the time of passing through the gate is executed (S502).

  As an example of the process at the time of passing through the gate executed in S502, the following process is executed. First, whether or not the number of general-purpose reserved storage, which is the number of general-purpose reserved storage data stored in the general-purpose reserved storage unit provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 55, is a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). Determine whether or not. The usual figure storage unit stores a maximum of four random number numerical data for determining the display result of the normal symbol extracted when the gate pass of the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a as the normal figure storage data. It has a data storage area for storing. This ordinary reserved storage unit, like the above-described first reserved storage buffer and second reserved storage buffer, saves the order in which the ordinary reserved storage data is stored in an identifiable state, and changes according to the order. The general-purpose reserved storage data used for display is erased, and the data storage area is shifted one by one for the remaining general-purpose reserved storage data.

  In S <b> 502, when the number of ordinary map storage is less than the upper limit value, the CPU 56 extracts numerical data indicating random 4. Then, the extracted random 4 numerical data is set as general-purpose storage data in the first-order area of the data storage area that is not stored in the general-purpose storage section and is free. On the other hand, if the number of the general-purpose reserved memory reaches the upper limit value in the general-purpose reserved storage unit, the detection of the current game ball is invalidated, and the random number 4 is not newly extracted and stored.

  After the processing at the time of passing the gate and after it is determined in S501 that the detection signal from the gate switch 32a is in the OFF state, the following S510 to S514 are performed according to the value of the normal symbol process flag. Execute each process.

  The normal symbol normal process of S510 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “0”. In this normal symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol display on the normal symbol display 10 is to be started based on the presence / absence of the universal symbol storage data stored in the universal symbol storage unit. . At this time, for example, when there is the general-purpose hold storage data stored in the general-purpose hold storage unit, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to “1”.

  The normal symbol determination process of S511 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “1”. In this normal symbol determination process, based on whether or not the time reduction flag is set, it recognizes whether or not it is in the electric chew support control state, and the universal symbol hold memory stored in the head order of the universal symbol hold memory unit. Based on the data (numerical data indicating random 4 for determining the display result of the normal symbol), the normal symbol display result determination table shown in FIG. Or “departure” is determined.

  As described above, in the normal symbol display result determination table, when the electronic chew support control state corresponding to the short time state is set, the display result of the normal symbol is displayed more than in the normal gaming state which is the non-electric chew support control state. The decision value to be compared with the random number 4 is assigned so that the ratio of the decision of “winning” is increased. Thus, in the electric chew support control state, in the normal symbol determination process of S511, the display result of the normal symbol is more easily determined as “winning” than in the normal game state, so that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is formed. 2. The start winning opening 14 is likely to be in an open state, and the game ball is likely to enter the second starting winning opening 14 (start winning prize).

  In the normal symbol determination process, the normal symbol variation time is also determined using the normal symbol display result determination table. As described above, in the normal symbol display result determination table, when the electric chew support control state corresponding to the short time state is set, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is larger than that in the normal game state which is the non-electric chew support control state. It is set to be shorter. Thus, in the electric chew support control state, in the normal symbol determination process of S511, when the time reduction flag is set, the electric chew support control state is recognized, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is compared with the normal game state. The variation time is determined so as to be shorter. In the electric chew support control state, the interval at which the normal symbol variation display result is derived and displayed is shortened, so that the interval at which the “win” variation display result is derived and displayed is also shortened, and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is formed. The second start winning opening 14 is likely to be in an open state, and the game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening 14 (start winning prize).

  Furthermore, in the normal symbol determination process, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 (second start winning port 14) are also determined using the normal symbol display result determination table. As described above, the normal symbol display result determination table recognizes that the electric chew support control state is in effect when the hourly flag is set, and if it is in the electric chew support control state, The opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 (second start winning port 14) is set longer and the number of times of opening is larger than in the case of a certain normal gaming state. Therefore, in the electric chew support control state, the open time of the variable winning ball device 15 (second start winning port 14) becomes longer than in the normal game state in the non-electric chew support control state, and Control is performed so that the number of times of opening is increased. As a result, in the electric chew support control state, the opening time becomes longer and the number of times of opening increases, so that the time and number of times that the variable winning ball device 15 (second start winning opening 14) is in the opened state increase. This makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening 14 (start winning prize).

  In the normal symbol determination process, after such various determinations are made, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to “2”.

  The normal symbol variation process of S512 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “2”. In this normal symbol variation process, a setting for varying the normal symbol is performed in the normal symbol variation display by the normal symbol display 10. The normal symbol that is variably displayed based on these settings is displayed with the normal symbol display result that is the normal symbol display result when the normal symbol stop process of S513 is executed and the variation display is stopped. In the normal symbol variation process, an elapsed time after the normal symbol starts to be varied is measured. At this time, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the variation time determined in the normal symbol determination process. When the determined fluctuation time is reached, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The normal symbol stop process of S513 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “3”. In this normal symbol stop process, the normal symbol display unit 10 is set to stop the fluctuation display of the normal symbol and to display the display result. The setting for deriving and displaying the display result of the normal symbol is set to “3” for the value of the normal symbol process flag when the measured elapsed time reaches the determined variation time in the normal symbol variation process of S512. It may be performed before the update. Further, in the normal symbol stop process, when the display result of the normal symbol determined in the normal symbol determination process is “winning”, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is set with the opening time and the number of releases determined in the normal symbol determination process. After the operation pattern for driving the solenoid 16 to open and close is set, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to “4”. On the other hand, when the display result of the normal symbol determined in the normal symbol determination process is “out of”, the normal symbol process flag is cleared and the value is updated to “0”.

  The normal electric accessory actuating process of S514 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “4”. In this ordinary electric accessory actuating process, in response to the display result in the normal symbol variation display being “winning”, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is operated to open the second position by operating the movable piece in the open state. Control is performed to change the winning opening 14 from the closed state to the open state. For example, in the ordinary electric accessory actuating process, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is generated by generating a drive control signal for driving the solenoid 16 according to the setting of the actuating pattern set in the ordinary symbol stopping process of S513. Then, control is performed to make the open state based on the release time and the number of releases determined in the normal symbol determination process. Thereby, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened and closed with an operation pattern according to the gaming state and the display result as shown in FIG. When the drive of the solenoid 16 according to the setting of the operation pattern is completed, the normal symbol process flag is cleared and the value is updated to “0”.

  Next, control executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram showing random numbers used by the production control microcomputer 100.

  In FIG. 30, as an example, SR1-1 for determining the left stop symbol of the effect symbol, SR1-2 for determining the middle stop symbol of the effect symbol, SR1-3 for determining the right stop symbol of the effect symbol, the reserved memory effect SR2 for determining the period and SR3 for determining the reserved storage effect mode are shown.

  SR1-1, SR1-2, and SR1-3 are used for randomly determining the left, middle, and right stop symbols (final stop symbols excluding temporary stop symbols) of the effect symbols. SR2 is used to determine the effect period when the reserved memory effect is performed. SR3 is used to determine the effect mode when the reserved memory effect is performed.

  Each of such random numbers SR1-1 to SR3 is generated by counting of a random counter that updates the count value by software, and is cyclically updated within the range associated in FIG. By being extracted at a given timing, it is used as a random number.

  FIG. 31 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a stop symbol of an effect symbol (decoration symbol) in the effect display device 9.

  In the example shown in FIG. 31, when the received display result designation command indicates a confirmation jackpot (when the received display result designation command is a display result 2 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 stops the design. As a result, a combination of effect symbols (probability big hit symbol combination) in which three symbols of left, middle, and right are aligned is determined.

  When the received display result designation command indicates a probable big hit (when the received display result designation command is a display result 2 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 uses the left, middle, and right symbols as stop symbols. The combination of effect symbols (probability big hit symbol combination) with three symbols is determined. In the case of deviation (when the received display result designation command is a display result 1 designation command), a combination of effect symbols other than those described above (a combination of deviation symbols such as left / right inconsistency, right / left inconsistency, etc.) is determined. However, when the reach effect is accompanied, the combination of the effect symbols in which the left and right symbols are aligned is determined.

  The effect control CPU 101 uses “1, 2, 3” as a stop symbol when the received display result designation command indicates a big hit (when the received display result designation command is a display result 3 designation command). , “4, 5, 6” or “7, 8, 9”, etc., a combination of predetermined production symbols (for example, shifting to a probable big hit without going through a long-term big hit gaming state such as 9 rounds) A special symbol (combination of chance symbols) to be recalled) is determined.

  FIG. 32 is a diagram showing in tabular form the effects (round effects) scheduled to be performed in each of the first to ninth rounds in the big hit gaming state.

  In the first round, the hold storage effect for the 1R period or the 2R period is executed corresponding to the hold storage information of the production target hold storage number 1. In the second round, the hold storage effect for the 1R period or the 2R period started in the second round is executed corresponding to the hold storage information of the production target hold storage number 2. Further, in the second round, when the hold memory effect for the 2R period following the first round is performed, the hold memory effect is executed corresponding to the hold memory information of the effect target hold memory number 1.

  In the third round, the hold storage effect for the 1R period or the 2R period started in the third round is executed corresponding to the hold storage information of the production target hold storage number 3. Further, in the third round, when the hold memory effect for the 2R period following the second round is performed, the hold memory effect is executed corresponding to the hold memory information of the effect target hold memory number 2. In the fourth round, the hold storage effect for the 1R period or the 2R period started in the third round is executed corresponding to the hold storage information of the production target hold storage number 4. Further, in the fourth round, when the hold memory effect for the 2R period following the third round is performed, the hold memory effect is executed corresponding to the hold memory information of the effect target hold memory number 3.

  In the fifth round, the hold storage effect for the 1R period or the 2R period started in the fourth round is executed corresponding to the hold storage information of the production target hold memory number 5. Further, in the fifth round, when the hold memory effect for the 2R period following the fourth round is performed, the hold memory effect is executed corresponding to the hold memory information of the effect target hold memory number 4. In the sixth round, the hold storage effect for the 1R period or the 2R period started in the fifth round is executed corresponding to the hold storage information of the production target hold storage number 6. Further, in the sixth round, when the hold memory effect for the 2R period following the fifth round is performed, the hold memory effect is executed corresponding to the hold memory information of the effect target hold memory number 5.

  In the seventh round, a hold storage effect for the 1R period or the 2R period started in the seventh round is executed corresponding to the hold storage information of the production target hold memory number 7. Further, in the seventh round, when the hold memory effect for the 2R period following the sixth round is performed, the hold memory effect is executed corresponding to the hold memory information of the effect target hold memory number 6. In the eighth round, the hold storage effect for the 1R period is executed corresponding to the hold storage information of the production target hold storage number 8. Further, in the eighth round, when the hold memory effect for the 2R period following the seventh round is performed, the hold memory effect is executed corresponding to the hold memory information of the effect target hold memory number 7. In the eighth round, the reserved storage effect for the 2R period started in the eighth round is not executed. This is because the revival effect is executed in the ninth round.

  In the ninth round, the revival effect is executed corresponding to the hold storage information of the production target hold storage numbers 1 to 8.

  FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect period determination table used when determining the effect period corresponding to each hold determination data when executing the hold memory effect.

  As the effect period determination table, the first effect period determination table used when the remaining number of rounds for which the reserved memory effect is performed (hereinafter referred to as the remaining number of reserved memory effect rounds) is a predetermined number or more, and the remaining number of reserved memory effect rounds And a second effect period determination table used when is less than a predetermined number. These effect period determination tables are stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100. Here, the remaining number of reserved storage effects rounds is calculated by performing an operation of “8 rounds—round number counter value”.

  The round number counter is a counter that counts the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state. The initial value is “0”, and when it becomes the first round, it is updated to “1” and becomes the second round. It is a counter that is incremented and updated by 1 at each round, such as sometimes being incremented and updated to “2”.

  In the case of this embodiment, when the remaining number of reserved storage effects rounds is calculated, the round number counter value is subtracted from the round value of 8 rounds. This is because it is a round period. Therefore, for example, the number of remaining reserved storage effect rounds in the fifth round is 3, the number of remaining stored storage effect rounds in the seventh round is 1, and the number of remaining stored storage effect rounds in the eighth round is calculated as 0.

  The first effect period determination table shown in FIG. 33 (A) is used when the remaining number of reserved storage effect rounds is 4 or more. The second effect period determination table shown in FIG. 33 (B) is used when the number of remaining reserved storage effect rounds is 1 or more and 3 or less.

  In the first effect period determination table shown in FIG. 33 (A), the 1R period and the 2R are each displayed when the probability change is a big hit, reach is out, and non-reach is out, which are fluctuation display results specified by the on-hold storage data to be produced. The value of SR2 (1 to 70) for selecting each of the periods is set. In the first effect period determination table, data is set such that the ratio of the ratios for selecting the 1R period is such that the probability variation big hit time <reach out of time <non-reach out of time. Further, in the first effect period determination table, data is set so that the ratio of the ratios for selecting the 2R period is as follows: Probability big hit time> Leach out of time> Non-reach out of time. As a result, when the remaining number of pending storage effect rounds is 4 or more, the 2R period is more easily selected as the advantage that the fluctuation display mode and the fluctuation display result are felt to be advantageous to the player increases. The 1R period becomes easier to select as the degree of benefit that the result feels advantageous to the player is lower. In the first effect period determination table, in addition to the 1R period and the 2R period, data for selecting not to execute the hold memory effect may be set at a predetermined ratio, and it is selected not to execute the hold memory effect. When this is done, control may be performed so as not to execute the on-hold storage effect.

  In the second effect period determination table shown in FIG. 33 (B), similarly to the first effect period determination table, the variable display result specified by the reserved storage data to be effected is a probable big hit, when the reach is off, A value of SR2 (1 to 70) for selecting each of the 1R period and the 2R period is set every time the reach is lost. In the second effect period determination table, the data is set so that the ratio of the ratios for selecting the 1R period is such that the probability variation big hit time <the time when the reach is out of time <the time when the non-reach time is out. Furthermore, as will be described later, when the remaining number of reserved storage effect rounds is 0, that is, in the case of the eighth round, only one round remains because the period for executing the stored storage effect remains. Further, in the first effect period determination table, data is set so that the ratio of the ratios for selecting the 2R period is as follows: Probability big hit time> Leach out of time> Non-reach out of time. Furthermore, as will be described later, when the remaining number of reserved storage effect rounds is 0, that is, in the case of the eighth round, only one round remains because the period for executing the stored storage effect remains. As a result, when the remaining number of reserved storage effect rounds is 0 or more and less than 3, the 2R period is more easily selected as the degree of advantage that the fluctuation display mode and the fluctuation display result are felt to be advantageous to the player increases. The 1R period becomes easier to select as the degree of advantage that the display result feels advantageous to the player decreases. In the second effect period determination table, in addition to the 1R period and the 2R period, data for selecting not to execute the hold memory effect may be set at a predetermined ratio, and it is selected not to execute the hold memory effect. When this is done, control may be performed so as not to execute the on-hold storage effect.

  As shown in FIGS. 33 (A) and 33 (B), the probability of selecting the execution of the effect in the 2R period is high when it is a probable big hit, and one reserved memory is targeted at the execution timing of the effect in the 1R period. The rate at which the display result of the variable display becomes the big hit display result differs between when the reserved memory effect is performed and when the reserved memory effect is performed for one reserved memory at the execution timing of the effect in the 2R period. Specifically, when the stored data shows a probable big hit, the ratio of the production of the 2R period is higher than when the stored data shows a loss of reach and when the stored data shows a non-reach. Therefore, the timing for performing the suggestive effect changes for each right according to the jackpot determination result. As a result, since the control for changing the timing for executing the hold memory effect is performed in accordance with the determination result regarding the rights stored and reserved, the player's expectation changes depending on the effect timing at which the hold memory effect is executed. Therefore, the interest of the game can be further improved.

  In each of the first effect period determination table and the second effect period determination table, the 2R period is more easily selected as the advantage that the change display mode and the change display result are felt to be advantageous to the player increases. Since the 1R period becomes easier to be selected as the degree of advantage that the fluctuation display result is felt to be advantageous to the player becomes lower, when the 2R period is selected and the hold storage effect is executed over two rounds, It is possible to improve the interest of the player by improving the player's expectation for the big hit.

  Further, the ratio of selecting the 1R period is larger in the second effect period determination table than in the first effect period determination table for each of the probability variation big hit, reach loss, and non-reach error. The data is set so that the ratio of selecting is reduced. Furthermore, as will be described later, when the remaining number of reserved storage effect rounds is 0, that is, in the case of the eighth round, only one round remains because the period for executing the stored storage effect remains. Thereby, when the number of remaining reserved storage effect rounds is 0 or more and less than 3, the 1R period is more easily selected and the 2R period is less likely to be selected than when the remaining number of reserved storage effect rounds is 4 or more.

  In the present embodiment, the 2R period is provided as a period for performing the hold storage effect over a period of a plurality of rounds. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a period for performing the hold storage effect over a period of three rounds or more is selected. You may set so that. Moreover, you may set so that it can select from several types of production periods, such as providing 2R period and 3R period as production periods over several rounds.

  Moreover, in this Embodiment, what divided | segmented the production | presentation period of a pending | holding memory | production effect by the round period was demonstrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the on-hold storage effect production period may be divided by a predetermined production time, for example, every 30 seconds. Further, the effect period of the hold storage effect may be divided not by a predetermined effect time but by an effect time selected from a plurality of effect times. In that case, every time an effect period starts, a hold storage effect may be executed using an effect time selected from a plurality of effect times.

  In this embodiment, the storage is performed depending on whether the effect is performed in the 1R period as shown in FIGS. 9B and 9C or the effect is performed in the 2R period as shown in FIGS. 9H to 9J. The execution timing of the production is different. For example, the period for executing the reserved memory effect is different, and the timing for executing the character effect and the timing for executing the reserved color effect in the reserved memory effect are different. And, for example, as shown in FIG. 33, when the number of remaining reserved storage effect rounds is 4 or more, the ratio of selecting effects during the 2R period is higher than when the number of remaining stored storage effect rounds is 3 or less. The execution timing of the hold memory effect changes for each hold memory according to the remaining number of the hold memory effect rounds. As a result, since the control for changing the timing of performing the stored storage effect for each right is performed according to the number of rights stored and retained, it is possible to prevent the production timing at which the stored storage effect is executed from being biased. Can do.

  Also, the execution timing of the hold storage effect is determined depending on whether the effect is performed in the 1R period as shown in FIGS. 9B and 9C or the effect is performed in the 2R period as shown in FIGS. Is different. As shown in FIG. 33, when the stored data shows a probable big hit, the 2R period effect is selected when the stored data shows a loss of reach and when the stored data shows a non-reach error. Since the ratio of being played increases, the timing of performing the suggestive effect changes for each right according to the jackpot determination result. As a result, since the control for changing the timing for executing the hold memory effect is performed in accordance with the determination result regarding the rights stored and reserved, the player's expectation changes depending on the effect timing at which the hold memory effect is executed. Therefore, the interest of the game can be further improved.

  FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram showing a 1R period hold memory effect mode determination table used for selecting and determining the hold memory effect mode of the hold color effect when the effect period when executing the hold memory effect is determined as the 1R period. It is. As the 1R period hold memory effect mode determination table, the display result is a probable big hit in the hold determination data outside the effect of the hold memory effect when performing the hold memory effect for the hold determination data corresponding to each hold memory data. 1R period on-hold storage first effect mode determination table used when there is not, and 1R period on-hold storage second effect mode determination to be used when there is a display result that is likely to be a big hit in such hold determination data that is not the target of such effect And table. These 1R period hold storage effect mode determination tables are stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In the 1R period hold storage first effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 34A, the hold determination data corresponding to the hold storage data that is not the effect target when the hold memory effect is performed has a display result that is a probable big hit. Used when not included. For example, in the case where the effect target when performing the hold storage effect is the hold determination data corresponding to the fourth hold storage data, for example, the display result is displayed in the hold determination data corresponding to the hold storage data other than the fourth hold data. When the big hit is not included, the 1R period on-hold storage first effect mode determination table is used.

  The 1R period on-hold storage second effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 34 (B) includes one in which the display result is a probable big hit in the on-hold determination data corresponding to the on-hold storage data that is not the effect target when performing the hold memory effect. Used when For example, in the case where the presentation target when performing the hold storage effect is the hold determination data corresponding to the fourth hold storage data, for example, the display result is definitely changed to the hold determination data corresponding to the fifth hold storage data. 1R period on-hold storage second effect mode when on-hold determination data corresponding to non-fourth on-hold storage data includes one that results in a promising big hit, such as a big hit A decision table is used.

  In the 1R period hold storage first effect mode determination table, the change display result specified by the hold determination data corresponding to the hold storage data to be produced is held at each probability change big hit, reach break, non-reach break SR3 (1 to 100) values are set for selecting each of golden, red, green, and no effect (normal color: white), which are reserved storage effect modes of color effects. Here, of the reserved memory effect modes, the gold color is an effect mode in which the reserved memory image 90 is colored gold. Among the on-hold storage effect modes of the on-hold color effect, red is an effect mode that makes the on-hold storage image 90 red. Among the on-hold storage effect modes of the on-hold color effect, green is an effect mode in which the on-hold storage image 90 is green. Among the reserved color effects of the reserved color effect, no effect is an effect of maintaining the normal white color without performing the reserved memory effect.

  In the 1R period on-hold storage first effect mode determination table, data is set so that the ratio of the ratio of selecting the gold color is such that the probability variation big hit time> reach out, non-reach out. In this way, when the reserved storage data to be produced is a probable big hit, the ratio of selecting the gold color as the stored storage effect mode is higher than when the reach is lost or the non-reach is lost. Therefore, when the on-hold storage effect mode becomes gold, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the big hit. In particular, in this embodiment, the data is set so that the gold color can be selected only at the probability variation big hit, and when the reserved storage effect mode is gold, it is determined that the probability variation big hit. Therefore, when the on-hold storage effect mode is gold, the player's sense of expectation for jackpot can be made extremely high.

  Further, in the 1R period on-hold storage first effect mode determination table, data is set so that the ratio of the ratio of selecting red is such that probability variation big hit time> reach out of time> non-reach out of time. As described above, when the reserved storage data to be produced is a probable big hit, the ratio of selecting red as the reserved storage effect mode is higher than when the reach is lost or the non-reach is lost. In addition, when the reserved storage data to be produced is a reach that includes probability variation big hits and out of reach, the ratio of selecting red as the on-hold storage effect mode is higher than in the case of non-reach out. Therefore, when the reserved memory effect mode is red, not as much as when it is gold, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the big hit. Further, when the on-hold storage effect mode becomes red, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for reach.

  Further, in the 1R period on-hold storage first effect mode determination table, data is set so that the ratio of the ratio of selecting the green color is as follows: when reach is lost> when probability change is big hit> when not reach is lost. As described above, when the reserved storage data to be produced is out of reach, the ratio of selecting green as the on-hold storage production mode is higher than when the probability variation big hit or non-reach is out. In addition, when the hold storage data to be produced is a probable big hit, the ratio of selecting green as the hold storage production mode is higher than when the non-reach is lost. In addition, when the reserved storage data to be produced is a reach that includes a probable big hit and reach lag, the ratio of selecting green as the hold memory presentation mode is higher than when the non-reach lag occurs. Accordingly, when the on-hold storage effect mode is green, not as much as when it is gold or red, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the big hit. Further, when the on-hold storage effect mode is green, not as much as when it is red, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for reach.

  Further, in the 1R period on-hold storage first effect mode determination table, data is set so that the magnitude relationship of the ratio of selecting no effect is such that probability variation big hit time <reach out of time <non-reach out of time. As described above, when the reserved storage data to be produced is non-reachable, the ratio of selecting “no stored memory production” is higher than when the probability variation big hit or reach is out of reach. In addition, when the hold storage data to be produced is out of reach, the ratio of selecting “no hold storage production” is higher than when the probable big hit. When the hold storage data to be produced is a probable big hit, no hold storage production is not selected. Therefore, when the big hit gaming state is entered, if the reserved memory effect is not performed, the player understands that the expectation to the big hit and reach is lower than when the reserved memory effect is performed. Can do.

  Also, in the 1R period on-hold storage second effect mode determination table in FIG. 34 (B), basically, the probability change big hit time and the reach off time regarding selection of the hold memory effect mode in the 1R period hold memory first effect mode determination table Although the data is set in the same magnitude relationship as the selection ratio between the non-reach and the non-reach, compared to the 1R period hold storage first effect mode determination table, the gold selection ratio at the time of probable big hit The data is set so that the selection ratio of red increases when the reach is lost, and the green selection ratio increases when the reach is off. Accordingly, whether or not the determination result regarding the right that is reserved and stored includes the right that the display result of the variable display becomes the jackpot display result in the right other than the right that is the target of the storage and storage effect. Accordingly, at least one of the effect mode and the execution probability for the reserved storage effect is made different, so that the display result of the variable display is a jackpot display based on the fact that at least one of the effect mode and the execution probability is different. It can be emphasized more that the resulting rights are included.

  In the 1R period on-hold storage first effect mode determination table and the 1R period on-hold storage second effect mode determination table, data is set so that gold can be selected as the on-hold storage effect mode even when the reach is out and non-reach is out. May be. In this case, the data may be set so that the relationship between the ratios for selecting the gold color is, for example, the probability variation big hit time> reach out of time> non-reach out of time. Further, in the 1R period on-hold storage first effect mode determination table and the 1R period on-hold memory second effect mode determination table, data may be set so that red can be selected as the on-hold storage effect mode even when non-reach is lost. . In this case, the data may be set so that the relationship of the ratio of selecting the red color is, for example, the probability variation big hit, when the reach is off, and when the reach is off.

  The magnitude relationship of the degree of advantage that the fluctuation display mode and the fluctuation display result are felt to be advantageous to the player is considered to be the probability variation big hit time> reach out of time> non-reach out of time. According to the 1R period on-hold storage first effect mode determination table, when gold is selected as the on-hold storage effect mode, a probable big hit is determined for the effect target, and green is selected when red is selected as the on-hold storage effect mode. The rate of probability variation big hit is higher than the time, and when green is selected, the rate of probability variation big hit is higher than when no effect is selected. Further, when red is selected as the reserved storage effect mode, the non-reach ratio is lower than when green is selected, and when non-reproduction is selected when green is selected, non-reach is shifted. The rate is low.

  Therefore, for the reserved storage effect mode, considering that the gold color is selected only at the time of the probable big hit, red and green are selected even when the reach is out of reach, and the ratio of red is selected at the time of out of reach than the green, The degree of advantage that the fluctuation display mode and the fluctuation display result are felt to be advantageous to the player can be indicated by the magnitude relationship of gold> red> green> no effect. Thereby, the sense of expectation to the big hit of the player can be enhanced by the reserved memory effect mode when the reserved memory effect is performed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In this embodiment, since it is set so that red is not selected at the time of non-reach, when the stored image becomes red, it is determined that the reach state is reached. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be set so that red can be selected at a predetermined ratio even when non-reach is off.

  FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram showing a 2R period reserved memory effect mode determination table used for selecting and determining the reserved memory effect mode of the reserved color effect when the effect period when executing the reserved memory effect is determined as the 2R period. It is. As the 2R period hold memory effect mode determination table, 2R used when there is no display result that is a probable big hit in the hold determination data that is not the effect of the hold memory effect when performing the hold memory effect for each hold determination data. A period hold storage first effect mode determination table and a 2R period hold memory second effect mode determination table used when there is a display result that is likely to be a big hit in such hold determination data that is not the effect target are included. These 2R period on-hold storage effect mode determination tables are stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100.

  The 2R period on-hold storage first effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 35A is used when the on-hold determination data other than the effect target when performing the on-hold storage effect does not include a display result whose probability is a big hit. It is done. For example, in the case where the production target when performing the hold storage production is the fourth hold determination data, for example, when the hold determination data other than the fourth does not include a display result that is a big hit The 2R period hold storage first effect mode determination table is used.

  The 2R period hold storage second effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 35 (B) is used when the hold determination data that is not the effect target when the hold memory effect is performed includes a display result that is a probable big hit. It is done. For example, in the case where the effect target when performing the hold storage effect is the fourth hold determination data, for example, the sixth hold determination data includes the one whose display result is a probable big hit, etc. The 2R period hold storage second effect mode determination table is used when the hold result data other than the fourth hold includes data whose display result is a probable big hit.

  In each of the 2R period hold storage first effect mode determination table and the 2R period hold memory second effect mode determination table, the 1R period hold memory first effect mode determination table and the 1R period hold memory second effect mode determination table of FIG. In the same manner as above, SR3 (selecting each of golden, red, green, and no effect (normal color: white), which is a reserved storage effect mode, at the time of the probable big hit, at the time of out of reach, or at the time of out of reach. 1 to 100) are set.

  In the 2R period on-hold storage first effect mode determination table, similar to the 2R period on-hold storage first effect mode determination table, the relationship between the ratios of selecting the gold color is when the probability change is big hit> the time when reach is out and the time when non-reach is out Data is set as follows. In the 2R period hold storage first effect mode determination table, the gold selection ratio is higher than each of the 1R period hold memory first effect mode determination table and the 1R period hold memory second effect mode determination table of FIG. Data is set in.

  Further, in the 2R period on-hold storage first effect mode determination table, data is set so that the ratio of the ratio of selecting red is such that when reach is lost> when probability change is big hit> when non-reach is lost. In the 2R period hold storage first effect mode determination table, the probability change big hit time and the reach off time are more red than the 1R period hold memory first effect mode determination table and the 1R period hold memory second effect mode determination table of FIG. Data is set so that the ratio of selecting is high.

  In the 2R period on-hold storage first effect mode determination table, data is set so that the ratio of the ratio of selecting green is such that non-reach out of time> reach out of time> probability big hit time. In the 2R period hold storage first effect mode determination table, the probability change big hit time and the reach off time are greener than the 1R period hold memory first effect mode determination table and the 1R period hold memory second effect mode determination table of FIG. The data is set so that the ratio of selecting green is low and the ratio of selecting green is high when non-reach is off.

  In the 2R period hold storage first effect mode determination table, data is set so that no effect is not selected.

  In the 2R period on-hold storage first effect mode determination table, the selection ratio of gold and red is higher at the time of the probability variation big hit than each of the 1R period on-hold memory first effect mode determination table and the 1R period hold memory second effect mode determination table. Thus, the data is set so that the selection ratio of red and green is high when the reach is off, and the green selection ratio is high when the non-reach is off. Thereby, in the 2R period hold storage first effect mode determination table, the variable display mode and the change display result are compared with the 1R period hold memory first effect mode determination table and the 1R period hold memory second effect mode determination table, respectively. There is a high proportion of colors that are selected to be highly advantageous for the player. Therefore, when the reserved memory effect is executed in the 2R period, it is easy to select a color that has a higher advantage for the player than when the reserved memory effect is executed in the 1R period. It can enhance the feeling and improve the interest of the game. Also, no effect is not selected in the 2R period hold storage first effect mode determination table. Therefore, since the reserved storage effect is always performed when the big hit gaming state is reached, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the big hit and improve the interest of the game.

  Also, in the 2R period on-hold storage second effect mode determination table in FIG. 35 (B), the probability change big hit time and the reach off time regarding the selection of the on-hold storage effect mode in the 2R period hold memory first effect mode determination table basically. Although the data is set in the same magnitude relationship as the selection ratio between the non-reach and the non-reach, the gold selection ratio at the time of the probable big hit compared to the 2R period hold storage first effect mode determination table The data is set so that the red selection ratio increases when the reach is lost, and the red selection ratio increases when the reach is off. Accordingly, in the 2R period on-hold storage second effect mode determination table, compared to the 2R period on-hold storage first effect mode determination table, the color having a high degree of advantage that the variable display mode and the variable display result are felt advantageous for the player is displayed. The percentage selected is high. Accordingly, whether or not the determination result regarding the right that is reserved and stored includes the right that the display result of the variable display becomes the jackpot display result in the right other than the right that is the target of the storage and storage effect. Accordingly, at least one of the effect mode and the execution probability for the reserved storage effect is made different, so that the display result of the variable display is a jackpot display based on the fact that at least one of the effect mode and the execution probability is different. It can be emphasized more that the resulting rights are included.

  In the present embodiment, an example in which red is selected at the time of non-reach in the 2R period on-hold storage second effect mode determination table is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the 2R period on-hold storage second effect mode determination table, red may not be selected when the non-reach is off. In the present embodiment, an example in which “no effect” is not selected in the 2R period on-hold storage first effect mode determination table and the 2R period on-hold storage second effect mode determination table is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and “no effect” may be selected at a predetermined rate.

  Also, in the 2R period hold storage first effect mode determination table and the 2R period hold memory second effect mode determination table, when the variation pattern is a big hit, and when the reach pattern is a shift pattern Only the data may be set so that the on-hold storage effect mode is red. In that case, when the on-hold storage effect mode is red, it is determined that the reach state is reached. Therefore, when the on-hold storage effect mode turns red, the player's sense of expectation for jackpot can be made extremely high.

  Further, in the 2R period hold storage first effect mode determination table and the 2R period hold memory second effect mode determination table, data is set so that the gold color can be selected as the hold memory effect mode even when the reach is out of reach and the non-reach out of place. May be. In this case, the data may be set so that the relationship between the ratios for selecting the gold color is, for example, the probability variation big hit time> reach out of time> non-reach out of time. Further, in the 2R period hold storage first effect mode determination table, data may be set so that red can be selected as the hold memory effect mode even when the non-reach is off. In this case, the data may be set so that the relationship of the ratio of selecting the red color is, for example, the probability variation big hit, when the reach is off, and when the reach is off. Further, in the 2R period on-hold storage first effect mode determination table and the 2R period on-hold storage second effect mode determination table, data may be set so that green can be selected as the on-hold storage effect mode even in the case of a probable big hit. In this case, the data may be set so that the magnitude relationship of the ratio of selecting green color is, for example, when the reach is lost> when the non-reach is lost> the probability variation big hit time. Further, in the 2R period on-hold storage first effect mode determination table, the probability change big hit, the reach out, and. Data may be set so that it is possible to select “no hold storage effect” even when non-reach is lost.

  Moreover, as conditions for selecting each of the 1R period on-hold storage second effect mode determination table in FIG. 34B and the 2R period on-hold storage second effect mode determination table in FIG. It may be set as one of the conditions when the data other than the above includes data that is a big hit that is more advantageous to the player with respect to the ball than the sudden big hit. For example, if it is decided to control at a predetermined rate for a normal big hit that does not become a probable change state after the big hit gaming state, as a big hit in which the big hit gaming state with the same number of rounds and the same opening time as the probability changing big hit is executed Even when the data other than the hold determination data includes data that is usually a big hit, each of the 1R period hold storage second effect mode determination table and the 2R period hold storage second effect mode determination table of FIG. May be selected.

  Moreover, as conditions for selecting each of the 1R period on-hold storage second effect mode determination table in FIG. 34B and the 2R period on-hold storage second effect mode determination table in FIG. It may be set as one of the conditions also when data other than the data that is a big hit is included.

  FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram showing a revival effect mode determination table used for selecting and determining the reserved storage effect mode of the reserved color effect in the revival effect. The revival effect effect mode determination table is stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100. The rebirth effect is a hold with a reserved color effect of “no effect” or “no data” specified by the data stored in the effect mode storage area for the first to eighth rounds of the reserved memory effect. This is an effect that is executed in the ninth round, with the stored information (the stored memory image 90 having a white reserved color) as an effect target.

  The revival effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 36 is used when performing the revival effect in the ninth round. In the revival effect mode determination table, similar to each of the 1R period hold storage effect mode determination table in FIG. 34 and the 2R period hold storage effect mode determination table in FIG. 35, the probability change big hit, the reach is out, and the non reach is out The values of SR3 (1 to 100) for selecting each of the reserved storage effect modes of gold, red, green, and no effect (normal color: white) are set.

  In the revival effect mode determination table, similar to the 1R period on-hold storage effect mode determination table in FIG. 34 and the 2R period on-hold storage effect mode determination table in FIG. The data is set so that the time is out of reach. In the revival effect mode determination table, data is set so that the ratio of selecting gold is higher than each of the 1R period hold memory effect mode determination table of FIG. 34 and the 2R period hold memory effect mode determination table of FIG. Yes.

  Also, in the revival effect mode determination table, the magnitude relationship of the ratio of selecting red is such that the reach failure time> probability big hit time> non-reach error time, as in the 2R period hold storage effect mode determination table of FIG. Data is set. In the revival effect mode determination table, the ratio of selecting red for the probable big hit time and the reach loss time is higher than each of the 1R period hold storage first effect mode determination table and the 1R period hold memory second effect mode determination table of FIG. Data is set to be higher.

  Further, in the revival effect mode determination table, the magnitude relationship of the ratio of selecting green is set to be in the case of non-reach outage> at the time of outreach> at the time of probable change big hit, similarly to the 2R period hold storage effect state determination table in FIG. Data is set. In the revival effect mode determination table, the ratio of selecting green is lower when the probability variation big hit and the reach is lost, and the ratio of selecting green is higher when the reach is not, than the 1R period hold storage effect mode determination table of FIG. The data is set so that

  Further, in the revival effect mode determination table, data is set so that the magnitude relationship of the ratio of selecting no effect is such that non-reach out of time> reach out of contact> probability big hit time. In the revival effect mode determination table, data is set so that the ratio of selecting “no effect” at the time of non-reach is higher than in the 1R period hold storage effect mode determination table of FIG.

  In this way, in the revival presentation mode determination table, the gold selection ratio is higher at the time of probability variation big hit than at the time of out-of-reach and non-reach outage, and at the time of loss of reach, the red color is selected at the time of probability variation big hit and non-reach out of focus The ratio of selecting green is higher at the time of non-reach and at the time of non-reach, and the ratio of selecting green is higher than at the time of non-reach and at the time of non-reach. Data is set in. Furthermore, in the revival effect mode determination table, the ratio of selecting the gold color is higher when the probable big hit than the 1R period hold storage effect mode determination table of FIG. 34 and the 2R period hold memory effect mode determination table of FIG. Data is set as follows.

  Thus, when the revival effect is performed in the ninth round, the gold color is more easily selected when it is a probable big hit than when the reserved storage effect is performed in the first to eighth rounds. Since the degree of coincidence between the determination contents of the stored storage information and the production mode is high when the probability is a big hit, the player's expectation for the revival production can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, when the revival effect is performed in the ninth round, an effect mode having a higher notice rank, such as gold and red, is selected as compared with the case where the reserved storage effect by the 1R period is performed in the first to eighth rounds. Since the ratio becomes high, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the rebirth effect and improve the interest of the game.

  In the revival effect mode determination table, the proportion of the effect modes with a higher notice rank such as gold and red is higher than when the reserved storage effect is performed in the 2R period in the first to eighth rounds. Data may be set so that

  FIG. 37 is a diagram illustrating a modification example of the effect mode of the reserved stored image when the resurrection effect is performed. In FIG. 37, the state before the change of the effect mode of the reserved storage image 90 (the state at the end of the eighth round) is (as the state of the reserved storage image 90 on the combined storage storage display unit 18c in the effect display device 9). A), the state after the change of the production mode (the state at the time of the revival production in the ninth round) is shown in (B).

  When the total pending storage number is “8”, which is the maximum number, as shown in FIGS. 37A and 37B, eight pending storage images 90 are displayed on the total pending storage display portion 18c. Then, the hold memory effect is executed for each of the eight hold memory images 90 in the first to eighth rounds. As shown in FIG. 37A, for example, when the second and third reserved storage images 90 are white corresponding to no effect or no data at the end of the eighth round, the revival effect is displayed in the ninth round. The second and third reserved stored images 90 are selected as effects. Then, when the revival success effect is executed as the revival effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 37A, the second and third reserved memory images 90 are reserved colors other than white such as red and green (also gold color). (Including)) will be performed. In addition, as a revival effect, when there is one or a plurality of reserved storage images 90 that are white corresponding to no effect or no data at the end of the eighth round, only one of them is selected in the ninth round. It may be selected and executed as a production target. Further, as a revival effect, when there are a plurality of white stored memory images 90 corresponding to no effect or no data at the end of the eighth round, in the ninth round, the plurality of reserved memory images are targeted for the effect. Selection may be made in accordance with a predetermined order to execute the revival effect. In this case, the order may be determined at random instead of a predetermined order.

  Next, the operation of the production control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the effect control main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80.

  The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the effect control main process when the power is turned on. In the effect control main process, first, an initialization process is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) (S701). ). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. In the effect control main process, if the timer interrupt flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (S703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command, and sets data such as a flag that can specify what the received effect control command indicates. Processing is performed (command analysis processing: S704). Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (S705). In the effect control process, in order to perform various effects such as a change display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 in accordance with the contents of the effect control command analyzed in S704, the current control among the processes corresponding to the control state is performed. A process corresponding to the state (effect control process flag) is selected and the effect control is executed.

  Next, a random number update process for updating the count value of the counter for generating various random numbers including SR1-1, SR1-2, SR1-3, SR2, SR3 as shown in FIG. 30 is executed (S706). Further, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the combined hold storage display unit 18c is executed (S707). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S702.

  By executing such effect control main processing, the effect control microcomputer 100 transmits the effect display device 9, various lamps, and the like according to the effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 and received. By controlling the production devices such as the speakers 27L and 27R, various production controls according to the gaming state are performed.

  39 to 41 are flowcharts showing specific examples of command analysis processing (S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer. In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in a command reception buffer formed in the RAM (S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the received command is stored in the command receiving buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the received command from the command receiving buffer (S612). Note that when read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (S613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  As the command receiving buffer, for example, a ring buffer type command receiving buffer capable of storing six 2-byte effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal and stored in the command reception buffer. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 10) is a predetermined command among the presentation control commands stored in the buffer area.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (S616).

  If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (S617), the effect control CPU 101 stores the display result designation command in a display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM (S618).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (S619), the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmation command reception flag (S620).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (S621), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (S622). If the received effect control command is a surprise start designation command (S623), the effect control CPU 101 sets a surprise start designation command reception flag (S624).

  If the received effect control command is the first symbol variation designation command (S625), the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (S626). If the received effect control command is the second symbol variation designation command (S627), the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (S628).

  If the received production control command is a power-on designation command (initialization designation command) (S631), the production control CPU 101 displays an initial screen on the production display device 9 indicating that the initialization process has been executed. (S632). The initial screen includes an initial display of predetermined production symbols.

  If the received effect control command is a power failure recovery designation command (S633), a predetermined power failure recovery screen (screen for displaying information notifying the player that the gaming state is continuing) is displayed. (S634) and a power failure recovery flag is set (S635).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (S641), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag as a corresponding flag (S642). If the received effect control command is a sudden big hit end designation command (S643), the production control CPU 101 sets a sudden big hit end designation command reception flag (S644).

  If the received effect control command is a command for opening a special prize opening (S645), the CPU 101 for effect control has the command for opening a special prize opening being open (the command varies depending on the number of rounds) in the RAM. It is stored in the special winning opening open designated command storage area (S646). Then, the special winning opening open flag is set (S647). If the received effect control command is a designated command after opening the special winning opening (S648), the production control CPU 101 forms the designated command after opening the special winning opening (the command varies depending on the number of rounds) in the RAM. It is stored in the designated command storage area after the big winning opening is opened (S649). Then, a flag after opening the big prize opening is set (S650).

  If the received effect control command is the first start prize designation command or the second start prize designation command (S651), the presentation control CPU 101 receives the first start prize designation command reception flag when receiving the first start prize designation command. When the second start winning designation command is received, the second starting winning designation command receiving flag is set (S652). Further, in S652, an unprocessed number counter indicating the number of start winning prizes that have not been subjected to the hold storage display process is incremented by one. As will be described later, based on the value of the unprocessed number counter, the number of pending storages in the total pending storage display unit 18c is added and displayed.

  If the received effect control command is a winning determination result specifying command (S653), the effect control CPU 101 receives the winning determination result specifying command (the command varies depending on the determination result) at the winning time formed in the RAM. The determination result specifying command storage area is stored (S654). Then, based on the winning determination result designation command, the data in the hold determination data storage area shown in FIG. 14A is updated (S655). Specifically, since the winning determination result designation command can specify the jackpot determination result, the jackpot type, and the variation pattern type, the jackpot determination result, jackpot type specified by the received winning determination result designation command, The variation pattern type is stored in the storage area corresponding to the minimum value of the vacant numbers of the production target hold storage numbers for which no hold determination data is stored in the winning determination result designation command storage area. In addition, when a winning determination result designation command is received, whichever flag is set by the start prize designation command received at the start prize among the first start prize designation command reception flag or the second start prize designation command reception flag. Depending on whether the start prize is for the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and based on the determination result, the hold determination data is stored in the determination result designation command storage area at the time of winning Data indicating which is the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stored in the storage area corresponding to the minimum value of the unused numbers of the production target hold storage numbers that are not performed. Thereby, in the hold determination data storage area as shown in FIG. 14A, the hold determination data corresponding to the hold storage data stored by the game control microcomputer 560 is stored in the effect control microcomputer 100. It will be. In addition, since the determination value for the winning determination result specifying command is determined as a big hit, the data is also stored in the storage area corresponding to the production target hold storage number.

  When the received effect control command is a hold memory subtraction designation command (S656), the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the hold subtraction counter for subtracting and updating the hold memory display in the combined hold memory display unit 18c. Processing is performed (S657). Based on the value of the hold subtraction counter, the hold storage display is subtracted and updated as will be described later. If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 101 executes processing corresponding to the received effect control command (S658), and proceeds to S611. The corresponding processing is, for example, processing such as processing for setting a flag corresponding to the received command corresponding to the received command and processing for storing the received command in a predetermined storage area of the RAM.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (S705) in the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 performs one of S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled, and the effect symbol variation display is realized, but the control related to the effect symbol variation display synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol is also the second. Control related to the change display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the variation pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (S801).

  Effect symbol variation start processing (S801): Control is performed so that variation display of the effect symbol (decoration symbol) is started. Further, the stop symbol (display result) of the effect symbol is determined based on SR1-1 to SR1-3 and the like. At the start of the variation display, the timing of the variation display time timer that measures the variation time of the variation display executed in response to the received variation pattern command is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (S802).

  Production symbol variation processing (S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors whether or not the variation time counted by the variation display time timer has ended. Then, based on the fact that the fluctuation time has ended or that an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) for instructing all symbols to stop is received, the value of the effect control process flag is effected to end the variable display. It is updated to a value corresponding to the symbol variation stop process (S803).

  Effect symbol variation stop processing (S803): Control is performed to stop the variation display of the effect symbol (decoration symbol) and derive and display the display result (stop symbol) of the variation display. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800).

  Big hit display process (S804): After the end of the variation time, display control such as a fanfare effect as an effect such as a big hit display for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of the big win is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game processing (S805).

  In-round processing (S805): Display control during round is performed. If the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post-round processing (S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end process (S807).

  Post-round processing (S806): Display control between rounds is performed. If the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (S805).

  Big hit end effect processing (S807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800).

  The effect control CPU 101 determines the stop symbol of the effect symbol as follows, for example. For example, in the effect symbol variation start process, random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the stop symbol of the effect symbol are extracted, and a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating the effect symbol is associated with a numerical value. Are used to determine the stop symbol of the effect symbol. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting data indicating the combination of effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value matching the extracted random number. Then, the effect control CPU 101 stops the effect symbol at the stop symbol determined in this way when stopping the variation display of the effect symbol. With regard to the production symbol, a stop symbol reminiscent of a big hit is called a big hit symbol. And a stop symbol that reminds of a loss is called a loss symbol.

  Specifically, the stop symbol of the effect symbol is determined as follows, for example. When determining a combination of non-reach off symbols, numerical data (random numbers) is extracted from each of SR1-1 to SR1-3 at a predetermined timing and stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 100. Using the symbol determination data table, the symbol corresponding to the extracted random number is determined as a combination of stop symbols that result in a variation display result of the left, middle, and right effect symbols. Thus, when determining a combination of non-reach off symbols, if the stop symbol corresponding to the extracted random number coincides with a combination of a big hit symbol or a combination of special symbols (chance eyes), Each stop symbol is determined by correcting it to be a combination (for example, correcting the right symbol by one symbol). Further, when the stop symbol corresponding to the extracted random number becomes a reach symbol by chance, each stop symbol is corrected by making a combination of non-reach off symbols (for example, correction for shifting the middle symbol by one symbol). Is determined.

  Further, when determining a combination of symbols that are out of reach, numerical data (random numbers) is extracted from each of SR1-1 to SR1-3 at a predetermined timing, and SR1-1 is used using a data table for determining outliers. The symbol corresponding to the random number extracted from is determined as the stop symbol of each effect symbol forming the reach state, and the symbol corresponding to the random number that matches the counter value extracted from SR1-2 is the stop symbol of the final stop symbol As determined.

  In determining the jackpot symbol combination, the jackpot symbol combination is determined according to the jackpot type.

  When it is decided to make a promising big hit, using the big hit symbol determination table, for example, the combination of any symbols such as “7, 7, 7” on the left, middle and right is selected and determined. To do. In the jackpot symbol determination table, each numerical data of SR1-1 is associated with each of a plurality of predetermined symbols. When determining a jackpot symbol combination, numerical data (random numbers) is extracted from SR1-1 at a predetermined timing, and a symbol corresponding to the extracted random number is configured as a jackpot symbol combination using the jackpot symbol determination table. It is determined as a combination of stop symbols for the left, middle, and right production symbols. The symbol determined in this way is used as a final stop symbol which is a variation display result before being controlled to the big hit gaming state. In addition, in place of a sudden big hit with the number of times of opening twice and an opening time of 0.5 seconds, in the case where a sudden big hit as described above can be obtained substantially but the prize ball is smaller than the probable big hit is provided. Of the symbol combinations having the left, middle and right effect symbols, the odd symbol combinations are assigned to the probability variation big hits, and the even symbol combinations are assigned to the sudden big hits that can substantially obtain the winning ball. It may be.

  Further, when it is decided to make a big hit, using the special symbol determination table, for example, “1, 2, 3”, “4, 5, 6” or “ It is selected and determined as a combination of effect symbols of “7, 8, 9”.

  FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. In other words, the effect control CPU 101 performs a process table during a predetermined effect control period from the start of the variable display to the stop of the variable display and from the start of the big hit gaming state to the end of the big hit gaming state. In accordance with the process data set in the above, effect devices (effect parts) such as the effect display device 9 are controlled.

  The process table includes process timer set values and data obtained by collecting a plurality of combinations of display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variation time (variation display time) of the variation display of the effect symbol (decoration symbol). Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and performs control to display the effect symbol in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value.

  The process table shown in FIG. 43 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. A process table is prepared for each variation pattern.

  In addition, in the process table used when effect control is executed for a variation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time further elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream and the sliding effect. May be.

  The effect control CPU 101 displays the contents of the process data 1 selected according to the change pattern (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) in steps S801 to S803 when the display of the effect symbols is changed. ), The control of the effect device (the effect display device 9 as the effect part, the various lamps as the effect part, and the speakers 27R and 27L as the effect parts) is executed. For example, in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9, a command is output to the VDP 109. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. Further, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio output board 70 in order to output audio from the speakers 27R and 27L.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect pattern CPU 101 so that the effect pattern is displayed in a change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command on a one-to-one basis. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG.

  In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation display result is determined to be off (S601). Whether or not it is determined to be out of place is determined by, for example, whether or not a display result 1 designation command is stored in the display result specifying command storage area. Note that whether or not it is determined to be out of play may be confirmed based on a change pattern command that can specify whether or not to make a big hit. If it is determined to be off, it is confirmed whether a command corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern is received as the fluctuation pattern command (S602). Whether or not a command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern has been received is determined, for example, based on data stored in the variation pattern command storage area.

  When it is determined that the command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern has been received, the effect control CPU 101 uses the predetermined error symbol determination data table to determine a stop symbol that does not become a reach of the effect symbol ( The process proceeds to S604) and S616. In the loss symbol determination data table, the numerical data of SR1-1 to SR1-3 are associated with each of a plurality of types of effect symbols. In the process of S604, numerical data (random numbers) is extracted from each of SR1-1 to SR1-3 at a predetermined timing, and extracted using the detachable symbol determination data table stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 100. The symbols corresponding to the numerical data thus determined are determined as combinations of stop symbols that result in the variation display of the left, middle, and right effect symbols. Thus, when determining the combination of non-reach off symbols, if the stop symbol corresponding to the extracted random number coincides with a combination of chance big hit symbols (probability big hit symbol combination, sudden probability big hit symbol combination, Each stop symbol is determined by correction (for example, correction by shifting the right symbol by one symbol) so that it becomes a combination of missing symbols, or the stop symbol corresponding to the extracted random number becomes a reach symbol accidentally In this case, each stop symbol is determined by correcting (for example, correcting the right symbol by one symbol) so as to be a combination of non-reach off symbols.

  When it is determined in step S602 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (when it is determined that the pattern is a reach variation pattern), the effect control CPU 101 determines a stop symbol of the effect symbols constituting the reach combination (S605). The process proceeds to S616. In the process of S605, numerical data (random numbers) is extracted from each of SR1-1 to SR1-3 at a predetermined timing, and the symbol corresponding to the random number extracted from SR1-1 is extracted using the loss symbol determination data table. A symbol corresponding to a random number that matches the counter value extracted from SR1-2 is determined as a stop symbol of the middle symbol, which is determined as a stop symbol of each of the left and right effect symbols forming the reach state. In this case as well, when the symbol combination is accidentally a combination of symbols, the stop symbols are determined by correcting the symbols so that they become a combination of symbols that are out of place (for example, correction for shifting the middle symbol by one symbol).

  If it is not determined to be off (S601), the effect control CPU 101 determines a stop symbol of the effect symbols constituting the winning symbol combination according to the type of the big hit (S603), and proceeds to S616. .

In S603, the winning symbol combination is determined according to the winning type as follows.
The effect control CPU 101 determines the jackpot type based on which display result designation command of the display result 2 designation command and the display result 3 designation command is stored in the display result specifying command storage area.

  When it is determined that it is determined to be a probable big hit, using the big hit symbol determination table, a combination of the probable big hit symbols (for example, “7, 7, 7” for the left, middle and right) The combination of the lozenges is selected and determined. In the jackpot symbol determination table, each of the numerical data of SR1-1 is associated with each of a plurality of predetermined probability variation jackpot symbols. When determining the combination of the probable big hit symbol, the numerical data (random number) is extracted from SR1-1 at a predetermined timing, and the symbol corresponding to the extracted random number is used as the combination of the probable big hit symbol combination using the big hit symbol determining table. It is determined as a combination of stop symbols of the left, middle, and right production symbols. The symbol determined in this way is used as a final stop symbol which is a variation display result before being controlled to the big hit gaming state.

  When the effect control CPU 101 determines that it has been determined to make a big hit, the combination of the big hit symbols (for example, “1, 2, , 3 ") is selected and determined. In the accuracy symbol determination table, each numerical data of SR1-1 is associated with each of a plurality of types of accuracy symbol combinations. When determining the combination of the winning big hit symbol, numerical data (random number) is extracted from SR1-1 at a predetermined timing, and the symbol corresponding to the extracted random number is configured using the winning symbol determination table. The combination of the stop symbol of the left, middle and right effect symbols is determined. As described above, when a big hit is made, the symbols may be replaced after the reach symbol combination is displayed once. At that time, the reach symbol is extracted from SR1-1 at a predetermined timing, and numerical data (random number) is extracted from the normal jackpot symbol determination table. The symbol corresponding to the extracted random number is used as the left and right of the reach symbol. It is determined as a combination of the production symbols.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes effect setting processing for setting an effect pattern for executing a specific effect such as a notice effect (for example, a jackpot notice effect or a reach notice effect) executed during variable display. (S616). For example, whether or not to perform the notice effect during the variable display is determined at a predetermined ratio in the effect setting process. Note that in the hold memory effect during the big hit gaming state as described above, when the player recognizes that the hold color is gold and that the big hit is confirmed, no notice effect is displayed during the variable display. The ratio of selecting the notice effect may be varied depending on the execution result of the reserved memory effect in the big hit gaming state, such as restricting the execution of the notice effect so as not to be executed.

  Next, the effect control pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types of effect control patterns (S617). The production control CPU 101 stores the design variation control pattern table in accordance with the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command and the various production control (production operation) patterns designated by the production pattern determined in the process of S616. Of the plurality of types of stored symbol variation control patterns, one of the effect control patterns corresponding to the specified various effect operation patterns is selected and determined as a use pattern.

  In the control pattern table stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 100, for example, the production display during the period from the start of the production design change until the final production design that is the final stop design is stopped and displayed. Data indicating the control contents of various effect operations such as the effect symbol display operation in the display area of the device 9, the effect display operation in the reach effect, the effect display operation by the pseudo-ream or slip effect, and the effect display operation in the notice effect. Are stored as a plurality of symbol variation control patterns.

  In addition, each symbol variation control pattern is, for example, an effect symbol variation display such as an effect control process timer setting value, an effect control process timer determination value, an effect display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, and an end code. The control data for controlling the various types of performance operations is included, and the contents of the various types of performance control, the timing of switching the performance control, and the like are set in time series. As the symbol variation control pattern table, a symbol control pattern table composed of control data for controlling the effect operation of the effect symbol, and a control for controlling the effect operation of the notice effect different from the effect operation of the effect symbol By providing a notice control pattern table made up of data and using a combination of control data for controlling the effect operation of these effect symbols and control data for controlling the effect operation of the notice effect, one symbol variation You may comprise so that the production | presentation operation | movement similar to the case where the production | presentation operation of a symbol and the production | presentation operation of a notice may be performed with a control pattern table.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the effect control pattern selected in S617 (S618). Then, a process timer (effect setting process timer) in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (S619).

  When the CPU 101 for effect control executes the process of S619, the effect device (the effect display device 9 as an effect part) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Then, the control of the various lamps as the production component and the speaker 27 as the production component is started (S620). For example, in accordance with the display control execution data, an instruction is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image (including an effect symbol) corresponding to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27.

  Then, a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command is set in the variation time timer (S621), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (S802) (S622). ).

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a jackpot display process (S804) in the effect control process. In the big hit display process, the production control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not the big prize opening open flag indicating that the big prize opening open designation command has been received is set (S901). When the big prize opening open flag is not set (N in S901), the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (S902).

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes control of the effect device (the effect display device 9, the speaker 27, the lamps 28a to 28c, etc.) according to the contents of the process data n (S903). For example, in order to display an image according to the effect of the big hit gaming state on the effect display device 9, the image data is read from the character ROM in accordance with the contents of the process data n (display control execution data n), and the read image data is converted to the VDP 109. And a control signal. In addition, a control signal is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to control various lamps to be turned on / off. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound of music or the like from the speaker 27. In this case, for example, the effect display device 9 displays a combination of jackpot symbols, and displays a character or character indicating that a jackpot has occurred.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (S906). If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (S907). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (S908).

  When the special winning opening open flag is set (Y in S901), a notice determination process is executed (S908A). The notice determination process is a process for making a decision regarding the reserved storage effect as the prefetch notice, and the specific processing content will be described with reference to FIG. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 produces an effect during the round (an effect of executing a round display corresponding to the number of rounds) based on the contents of the special winning opening opening designation command and the determination result in the notice determination process in S908A. ) Is selected (S909).

  As a result, for example, a reserved color effect as shown in FIG. Specifically, in S909, among the hold storage effects including the character effect and the hold color effect, the display of the character effect image and the display of the hold memory selection image 91 are executed by the mid-round process as the effect control process process. . Further, the reserved color effect among the reserved storage effects is performed in the reserved memory display control process (FIG. 51) for controlling the display of the reserved memory image 90. As shown in FIG. 9, changing the effect mode of the reserved memory image 90 is displayed by, for example, the reserved memory display control process of S707 as a control method other than the control for changing the color of the reserved memory image 90 itself. It is also possible to perform image display control for changing the color of the reserved storage image 90 by displaying another image such as a sprite image superimposed on the normal color reserved storage image. In that case, the hold color effect of the hold memory image 90 in the hold memory effect is executed by effect control process processing (big hit table processing and in-round processing).

  Next, the special winning opening open flag is reset (S910), and process data corresponding to the effect during the round is selected (S911). Then, the process timer is started (S912), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the in-round process (S805) (S913).

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing mid-round processing (S805) in the effect control process. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the operation effect process executed by the mid-round process.

  In the in-round processing of FIG. 46, the production control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not a big hit end designation command or a sudden big hit end designation command as a hit end designation command has been received (S1901). When the flag is not set (N in S1901), the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the flag after opening the big prize opening indicating that the designation command after opening the special prize opening is received is set. (S1902).

  When the flag after opening the big prize opening is not set (N in S1902), the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (S1903).

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes control of the effect device (the effect display device 9, the speaker 27, the lamps 28a to 28c, etc.) according to the contents of the process data n (display control execution data n) (S1904). . For example, in order to display an image corresponding to the effect during the round on the effect display device 9, the image data is read from the character ROM in accordance with the contents of the process data n (display control execution data n), and the read image data is output to the VDP 109. And a control signal is output. In addition, a control signal is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to control various lamps to be turned on / off. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27.

  Next, an operation effect process (S1904A) is performed in response to the operation of the operation button 130. In the operation effect process, after displaying the image of the operation reception effect as shown in FIG. 9B, the operation button 130 is operated (input of the operation detection signal from the operation detection switch 131), and within the operation effective period. When the operation button 130 is operated, an image of the reserved memory effect in the reserved memory effect mode determined by the notice determination process in S908A (for example, a character effect and a reserved color as shown in FIG. 9C) according to the operation. The processing for displaying the effect image) is performed.

  In the operation effect process, a process as shown in FIG. 47 is executed. In the operation effect process, first, it is confirmed whether or not the operation is valid (S991). In the present embodiment, the operation valid period is when the predetermined timing has elapsed from the start of each round for each of the first to eighth rounds of the stored storage effect and the revival effect of the ninth round. It is set as the start of the operation valid period. At the start and end of the operation valid period, the production control microcomputer 100 recognizes based on the time value of the process timer that starts counting from the start of the in-round process. In addition, about an operation effective period, you may make it set a different period with the hold | maintained storage effect of the 1st round-the 8th round, and the resurrection effect of the 9th round.

  If it is determined that the operation is valid, it is confirmed whether or not the operation detection flag set in S994 when the operation button 130 is operated during the operation valid period is set (S992). If it is determined that the operation detection flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the operation button 130 has been operated based on the level of the operation detection signal input from the operation button 130 (S993).

  If it is determined that the operation button 130 has not been operated, the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation button 130 has been operated, the operation detection flag described above is set (S994). The operation detection flag set in this way is reset when the round in which the flag is set ends. Then, the execution of the first to eighth rounds of the stored storage effect or the execution of the revival effect of the ninth round is started in the effect mode determined by the notice determination process executed in S908A or S1978A described later ( S995), the process is terminated.

  Specifically, in S995, when it is determined by the advance notice determination process for the 1st to 8th rounds that the reserved storage effect for the 1R period or 2R period is to be performed, the reserved storage effect period selection process (FIG. 50) described later. ) Including the reserved memory effect mode (the reserved memory effect effect period (1R period or 2R period), the character effect effect mode, The data for executing the character effect using the character image corresponding to the current round in the determined effect period (1R period or 2R period) based on the data specifying the effect mode of the reserved color effect) Is set to start execution of the character effect in the on-hold storage effect. Such an effect mode of the character effect is selected and determined in S759 and S760 of FIG.

  In S995, if it is decided to perform the restoration effect by the notice determination process for the ninth round, the effect form of the restoration effect (revival is determined and stored by the notice determination process (FIG. 49) described later). Based on the data specifying the success effect or the revival failure effect, and the reserved color effect effect mode, etc., data for executing the revival effect by the revival success effect or the revival failure effect is set. The execution of the effect as shown in FIG.

  When it is determined in S991 that the operation is not valid, it is confirmed whether or not the operation detection flag is set (S992). If it is determined in S992 that the operation detection flag is not set, the process is terminated because it is not necessary to execute the reserved color effect. On the other hand, when it is determined in S992 that the operation detection flag is set, the process proceeds to S996. If it is determined in S992 that the operation detection flag is set, the process proceeds to S996. In S996, it is confirmed whether or not the current timing is a timing for starting an effect of changing the reserved color in the reserved storage effect or the resurrection effect (S996).

  Specifically, in S996, for the first to eighth rounds of the stored storage effect, the reserved color in the stored storage effect is changed based on the data for specifying the stored storage effect mode stored in S736 of FIG. Whether or not the timing to start the reserved color effect is set, and whether or not the current timing is the timing to start the effect to change the reserved color by determining whether or not the current timing is the timing to start the reserved color effect Is confirmed (S996). The timing for starting the effect of changing the reserved color in the 1R period is determined in advance as the timing when a first time (for example, 20 seconds) has elapsed since the start of each round. Further, the timing for starting the effect of changing the reserved color in the 2R period is determined in advance as the timing when the second time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the second round in the 2R period. . In S996, when the hold memory effect for 1R period is performed based on the data specifying the hold memory effect mode stored in S736, the hold color is changed when the first time has elapsed from the start of each round. When it is determined that it is time to start the effect to be performed, and when the hold storage effect for the 2R period is performed, the effect that changes the hold color is started when the second time has elapsed from the start of the second round of the effect It is determined that it is time to perform.

  Also, in S996, for the revival effect of the ninth round, the effect mode of the revival effect determined by the notice determination process (FIG. 49) to be described later (FIG. 49), the revival success effect or the revival failure effect, and the reserved color The timing for starting the reserved color effect for changing the reserved color in the revival effect is set based on the data specifying the effect mode of the effect), and the current timing is the timing for starting the reserved color effect. By determining whether or not it is the timing to start the effect of changing the reserved color. The timing for starting the effect of changing the reserved color in the revival effect is determined in advance as the timing when a third time (for example, 20 seconds) has elapsed since the start of each round. In addition, in the first to eighth rounds of the stored storage effect, the timing for starting the effect of changing the reserved color by the reserved memory effect for the 1R period, the timing for starting the effect of changing the reserved color by the reserved memory effect of the 2R period, and As described above, the timing for starting the effect of changing the hold color in the revival effect of the ninth round may be set when a different time has elapsed from the start of each round, and the same time from the start of each round. It may be set when elapses.

  If it is determined in S996 that it is not the time to start the effect of changing the reserved color, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S996 that it is the timing to start the effect of changing the reserved color, in the reserved memory effect or the revival effect, any one of gold, red, and green regarding the reserved color effect with respect to any reserved determination data. It is confirmed whether or not it is decided to change to the reserved color (S997).

  Specifically, in S997, for the first to eighth rounds of the stored storage effects, as the effects of the reserved color effects, based on the data specifying the reserved memory effects stored in S736 of FIG. It is confirmed whether or not any one of gold, red, and green has been determined (S997).

  Also, in S997, for the revival effect of the ninth round, the revival effect effect mode determined by the notice determination process (FIG. 49) to be described later (FIG. 49) (reservation success effect or revival failure effect, and reserved color) Based on the data specifying the effect mode of the effect, etc., it is confirmed whether or not the color of the reserved color effect is determined to be one of gold, red, and green (S997).

  If it is determined in S997 that none of the reserved colors of gold, red, and green has been determined, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reserved color of gold, red, or green is determined in S997, the reserved color change effect data for designating the determined reserved color and the reserved storage image for changing the reserved color is stored in the RAM. Is set (stored) in the predetermined area (S998), and the process is terminated. As will be described later, the reserved color change effect data is reset when the reserved color of the reserved stored image is changed based on the data. When the reserved color change effect data is set as described above, the change target reserved memory image is changed to the specified reserved color, as shown in S520B of FIG. 51 described later. As a result, in the first to eighth rounds, the reserved color effect of the reserved memory image as shown in FIGS. 9C and 9J is executed, and in the ninth round, the reserved color is changed in the revival effect. A rank-up effect that ranks up is executed.

  Note that each of the hold storage effect and the resurrection effect may be executed when the above-described predetermined period has elapsed without the operation button 130 being operated. Further, with respect to the hold memory effect, the hold memory effect may be executed in each round without performing the operation effect as described above. In addition, the on-hold storage effect accompanying the operation effect may be executable in a part of all rounds.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (S1905), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (S1906). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (S1907).

  In this way, by performing time management using the process timer and sequentially switching the process data, for example, various effect controls including the hold storage effect shown in FIG. 9 are performed.

  In this case, for example, the effect display device 9 displays an in-round image such as an image of a reserved storage effect as shown in FIG. 9, and an effect of displaying characters indicating the number of rounds and other images is executed. An image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed.

  When the flag after opening the big prize opening is set in S1902 (Y in S1902), the production control microcomputer 100 performs interval production (interval according to the number of rounds) based on the contents of the designation command after opening the big prize opening. A display effect) is selected (S1908). Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 resets the flag after the special winning opening is opened (S1909), and selects process data corresponding to the selected interval effect (S1910). Then, the process timer is started (S1911), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the round post-processing (S806) (S1912).

  When the winning end designation command reception flag is set in S1901 (Y in S1901), a big hit end designation command or a sudden big hit end designation command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. In this case, an ending effect (a big hit end effect) is selected according to the received hit end designation command (S1913). Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 resets the set flag of the big hit end designation command reception flag or the sudden big hit end designation command reception flag (S1914). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 selects process data corresponding to the selected interval production (S1915). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 starts the production time measurement timer and starts the process timer (S1916). Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect process (S807) (S1917).

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing post-round processing (S806) in the effect control process. In the round post-processing, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the big prize opening open flag indicating that the special prize opening open designation command has been received is set (S1971). When the big prize opening open flag is not set (N of S1971), the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (S1972).

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes control of the effect device (the effect display device 9, the speaker 27, the lamps 28a to 28c, etc.) according to the contents of the process data n (display control execution data n) (S1973). . For example, in order to display an image corresponding to the interval effect on the effect display device 9, the image data is read from the character ROM in accordance with the contents of the process data n (display control execution data n), and the read image data is output to the VDP 109. At the same time, a control signal is output. In addition, a control signal is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to control various lamps to be turned on / off. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27.

  In this case, for example, the effect display device 9 displays a combination of jackpot display symbols, and an effect that displays a predetermined character or the like is executed, whereby an image corresponding to the interval effect is displayed.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (S1976), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (S1977). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (S1978).

  When the special winning opening open flag is set (Y in S1971), the notice determination process is executed (S1978A) as in S908A. The specific processing content of the notice determination processing will be described with reference to FIG. The production control microcomputer 100 produces an in-round production (production that executes round display according to the number of rounds) based on the contents of the special winning opening opening designation command and the determination result in the notice determination process in S1978A. Select (S1979). As a result, similarly to S909, a reserved storage effect as shown in FIG.

  Specifically, in S1979, the display of the character effect image and the display of the hold memory selection image 91 among the hold storage effects including the character effect and the hold color effect are performed as effect control process processing, as in S909 described above. It is executed by processing during the round. Further, the reserved color effect among the reserved storage effects is performed in the reserved memory display control process (FIG. 51) for controlling the display of the reserved memory image 90. As shown in FIG. 9, changing the effect mode of the reserved memory image 90 is displayed by, for example, the reserved memory display control process of S707 as a control method other than the control for changing the color of the reserved memory image 90 itself. The color of the reserved storage image 90 is changed by displaying another image such as a sprite image of a color determined based on the pre-reading of the hold determination data as described above on the normal color hold storage image. Image display control may be performed. In that case, the hold color effect of the hold memory image 90 in the hold memory effect is executed by effect control process processing (big hit table processing and in-round processing). Such a sprite image may be a predetermined type of image such as a character image determined based on pre-reading of the hold determination data as described above.

  Next, the special winning opening open flag is reset (S1980), and process data corresponding to the effect during the round is selected (S1981). Then, the process timer is started (S1982), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the in-round process (S805) (S1983).

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a notice determination process that is called and executed in each of S908A of the jackpot display process and S1978A of the post-round process.

  In the notice determination process, the production control microcomputer 100 first determines whether or not the current state is a big hit gaming state with a sudden big hit (S720). When the game is in the big hit gaming state, the process ends. As a result, the hold memory effect is not executed when the game is in the big hit gaming state. On the other hand, when the game state is not a big hit game state, a renewal process of incrementing the round number counter by 1 is performed (S721).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the 2R period effect flag is set (S722). The 2R period effect flag is a flag that is set when the effect period of the reserved memory effect is selected and determined in the 2R period in the reserved memory effect period selection process shown in S728 and FIG. As shown in FIGS. 45 and 49, the notice determination process is a process executed once before the start of each of the first to ninth rounds, and the 2R period effect flag is set at this stage. That is, the next round in which the 2R period effect flag is set in the previous round and the first round effect of the 2R period effect is performed. Next, the second round needs to be performed. Therefore, when it is determined in S722 that the 2R period effect flag is set, the process does not proceed to S724 and subsequent steps so that the effect mode of the reserved storage effect is not newly determined, and the 2R period effect flag is reset by S723. (S723) By proceeding to S737, which will be described later, the second round effect is performed following the first round effect of the 2R period effect.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S722 that the 2R period effect flag has not been set, the processing from S725 onward is executed in order to determine the effect mode of the new reserved storage effect. In S725, the hold determination data is pre-read by reading hold determination data corresponding to all the production target hold storage numbers stored in the hold determination data storage area shown in FIG. 14A (S725).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter is “9”, that is, whether or not it is the ninth round (S726). When it is the ninth round of the final round in the promising big hit game state, in order to perform the above-mentioned revival effect, the revival effect flag whose round number counter value is “9” is set in S726. When it is determined that the process proceeds to S740, which will be described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S726 that the value of the round number counter is not “9”, it is one of the first to eighth rounds, and corresponds to the value of the round number counter in the hold determination data prefetched in S725. It is determined whether or not the hold determination data is stored (S727).

  In S727, for example, when the value of the round number counter is “3”, it is determined whether data corresponding to the production target hold storage number “3” shown in FIG. 14 is stored as the hold determination data. That is, since the production target of the hold storage effect is basically the hold determination data of the production target hold storage number that is the same as the value of the number of rounds, it is determined whether or not the corresponding hold determination data is stored in S727. To do.

  When it is determined in S727 that the corresponding data is not stored, the process does not proceed to S728 and subsequent steps so as not to determine the effect mode of the new on-hold storage effect, and proceeds to S737 described later. Thereby, when the hold determination data having the same effect target hold storage number as the value of the number of rounds is not stored, the execution of the hold storage effect for the hold storage data corresponding to the number of rounds is prohibited. As a result, when the number of reserved memories is less than the number of rights to be subjected to the reserved memory effect, the execution of the reserved memory effect is restricted, so the relationship between the reserved memory effect and the reserved memory image becomes easy to understand. In addition, in the revival production of the ninth round, the execution frequency of the production for the hold memory does not decrease by being the production target even for the hold memory for which the hold memory production was not executed in the first to eighth rounds. The interest of the game can be further improved. On the other hand, when it is determined in S727 that the corresponding data is stored, a hold memory effect period selection process is executed to select a period for executing the hold memory effect (S728). In the on-hold storage effect period selection process, the period for executing the on-hold storage effect is selected and determined as either the 1R period or the 2R period. The contents of the on-hold storage effect period selection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, in the hold determination data read out in S725, it is determined whether or not the hold determination data other than the effect hold determination data includes data whose display result is a probable big hit (S729). When it is determined in S729 that there is data that is a probable big hit in the hold determination data other than the hold determination data to be produced, the second effect mode determination for the 1R period or the 2R period is determined according to the effect period selected in S728. A table is selected (S730), and the process proceeds to S732. Specifically, in S730, when the 1R period is selected as the effect period in S728, the 1R period hold storage second effect mode determination table of FIG. 34 (B) is selected, and the 2R period is selected as the effect period in S728. When selected, the 2R period hold storage second effect mode determination table of FIG. 35 (B) is selected. On the other hand, if it is determined in S729 that there is no data that is a probable big hit in the hold determination data other than the hold determination data to be produced, the first effect in the 1R period or 2R period, depending on the effect period selected in S728. The mode determination table is selected (S731), and the process proceeds to S732. Specifically, in S731, when the 1R period is selected as the effect period in S728, the 1R period hold storage first effect mode determination table of FIG. 34A is selected, and the 2R period is selected as the effect period in S728. When selected, the 2R period hold storage first effect mode determination table of FIG. 35 (B) is selected.

  In S732, it is confirmed whether the hold determination data to be produced is a probable big hit, a sudden big hit, out of reach, or out of reach (S732). Then, it is determined whether or not the hold determination data to be produced is a big hit (S732A). When the hold determination data to be produced is not a sudden big hit, SR3 for determining the stored memory production mode is extracted, and using the production mode determination table selected in S730 or S731, the production mode (golden color) of the reserved color production from the extracted value. , Red, green, or no effect) is determined (S733), and the process proceeds to S736.

  On the other hand, when the hold determination data to be produced is a big hit, the process proceeds to S736 without determining the production mode of the reserved color production in S733. Thereby, when the hold determination data to be produced is a big hit, the production mode of the reserved color production is not determined, and the production mode of the reserved storage production is “no data”. Therefore, the white color that is the normal color when the reserved memory effect is not performed is maintained for the reserved memory image to be effected. In other words, if the hold determination data to be produced is data that is a big hit that is unfavorable to the player in the opening mode of the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 (that is, the game) and is more likely to be a big hit than the probability change big hit, the hold color in the hold storage effect Since the execution of the effect is prohibited, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating by executing the reserved memory effect that suggests that it will be a big hit. In addition, when the hold determination data to be produced is data that is a big hit, instead of completely prohibiting the execution of the hold color effect, the rate at which the hold memory effect is executed becomes more than the other display results. You may control so that it may decrease. That is, if the hold determination data to be produced is data that is a big hit, any control may be performed as long as it is a control that restricts execution of the hold storage effect.

  Note that when determining the effect mode of the reserved color effect in S733, the determination ratio of the effect mode may be different between the hold determination data of the first special symbol and the hold determination data of the second special symbol. For example, if a plurality of types of effect mode determination tables having different effect mode determination ratios are provided, the effect mode determination table to be selected differs between the first special symbol hold determination data and the second special symbol hold determination data. Good. In addition, for example, when a big hit with a different number of rounds such as a 9 round big hit and a 12 round big hit is selected as the big hit type as a big hit other than the sudden big hit, for which a winning ball is substantially obtained. Depending on the maximum number of rounds, the determination ratio of the production mode may be different. For example, it is only necessary to provide a plurality of types of effect mode determination tables having different effect mode determination ratios, and to select different effect mode determination tables for the 9th round jackpot and the 12th round jackpot.

  In S736, the data specifying the effect period selected in the reserved storage effect period determining process in S728, the data specifying the effect mode of the character effect selected in the reserved memory effect period determining process in S728, and determined in S733. The data for specifying the effect mode such as the data for specifying the effect mode of the reserved color effect is specified as the reserved storage image (any of the first to eighth reserved memory images) as the effect target, and the effect control microcomputer The effect is stored in the effect mode storage area provided in the RAM of 100 (S736). Thereby, in the effect mode storage area, data specifying the hold storage effect mode is sequentially stored corresponding to each of the first to eighth effect target hold storage numbers. In accordance with the data stored in this manner, the hold storage effect is executed by processing such as in-round processing. Further, when the process proceeds from S732A to S736 without passing through S733, the data for specifying the effect mode of the reserved color effect is not stored, and therefore the reserved storage effect mode corresponding to the corresponding effect target hold storage number in the effect mode storage area. Among the data for specifying “No reserved color data”, there is no data for specifying the reserved color rendering mode determined in S733. Further, when the process proceeds from S723 or S727 to S737, S736 is not executed, and therefore data corresponding to the stored storage image corresponding to the round is not stored in the effect mode storage area. There will be no data specifying the on-hold storage effect mode corresponding to the corresponding effect target hold memory number.

  Note that the data for specifying the hold memory effect mode may be stored in the RAM in a mode for specifying the hold memory image by associating it with the hold determination data in the hold determination data storage area shown in FIG. . If it does in this way, in the production | presentation mode storage area, the hold memory production mode (including no production | presentation) determined about each holding | maintenance determination data in order from the holding | maintenance determination data corresponding to production | generation object hold | maintenance storage number 1 is specified. The data to be stored will be stored.

  Next, in S737, it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter is “9” which is the upper limit value, that is, whether or not it is the ninth round (S737). When it is determined that the value of the round number counter is not “9”, the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the round number counter is “9”, the value of the round number counter is reset to “0” (S738), and the process ends.

  When it is determined in S726 that the value of the round number counter is “9”, as the effect mode of the reserved color effect specified by the data stored in the effect mode storage area in S736, “ It is determined whether or not “no effect” or “no data” is included (S740). Here, “no data” refers to the case where the rendering mode of the reserved color effect is not determined in S733 under the following conditions. The first case is a case where S733 is not executed because the 2R period effect flag is set in S722. The second case is a case where S733 was not executed because the hold determination data corresponding to the round number counter was not stored in S727. The third case is a case where S733 is not executed because the hold determination data to be produced is data that is a big hit in S732A. In such a case, because the effect mode of the reserved color effect is not determined in S733, the data specifying the effect mode of the reserved color effect in the hold determination data is not stored in the effect mode storage area in S736. It becomes.

  If it is determined in S740 that there is no “no effect” or “no data”, the process proceeds to S742, and “green” is included in the stored storage effect modes specified by the data stored in the effect mode storage area in S736. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not there is a “red” reserved color rendering mode (S742). In this embodiment, among the reserved colors, “white”, “green”, and “red” are the production targets of the production that ranks up the production mode of the reserved color.

  When it is determined in S742 that there is no “green” or “red” reserved color production mode, there is no “no production”, “no data”, “green” or “red” production mode, Since there is no production target to rank up the production mode (the production mode of the reserved color is gold), the process proceeds to S737 described above. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is “no production” or “no data” in S740. Or, when it is determined in S742 that there is a green-colored or “red-colored” reserved color production mode, since there is a production effect of a revival production that ranks up the production mode of the reserved color, the corresponding hold determination data In order to determine the revival effect mode, the revival effect mode determination table of FIG. 36 is selected (S741). In this embodiment, when there is “no effect” or “no data” in the hold storage effect mode specified by the data stored in the effect mode storage area, the hold memory corresponding to the data is restored. It becomes the production target of the production. In addition, when there is no such “no effect” or “no data”, the “green” or “red” effect mode is included in the reserved storage effect modes specified by the data stored in the effect mode storage area. At some point, the reserved memory corresponding to such data becomes the production target of the revival effect. In addition, even when there is “no effect” or “no data”, if there is an effect mode of “green” or “red”, data of such “green” or “red” effect mode is supported. The reserved storage to be performed may also be set as a production target for the revival effect. In other words, it is only necessary to select at least “no effect” or “no data” as the production target of the revival effect.

  Then, with respect to the hold determination data corresponding to the production target of the revival effect, it is confirmed for each hold determination data whether the display result is a probable big hit, a sudden big hit, a reach out, or a non-reach out (S743). . Next, with respect to the hold determination data confirmed in S741, SR3 for determining the hold storage effect mode is extracted, and using the revival effect mode determination table selected in S741, the effect of the reserved color effect in the revival effect is extracted from the extracted value. A mode (any of gold, red, green, and no production) is selected (S744), and the process proceeds to S745.

  In this way, as the production target in which the production mode of the reserved color production in the restoration production is determined by S744, the color of the reservation does not change to “white” due to “no production” or “no data” by the processing of S740 and S742. When the reserved memory is preferentially selected and there is no such reserved memory, the reserved memory of the “green” or “red” reserved color is selected. In this way, the hold memory in which the display mode of the hold memory display has not changed due to the hold memory effect in the first to eighth rounds is prioritized over the hold memory in which the display mode of the hold memory display has changed, and the resurrection effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display mode from changing only a part of the reserved storage image among the reserved storage images in the combined reservation storage display unit 18c. In addition, as an effect target for which the effect mode of the reserved color effect in the resurrection effect is determined, for example, the reserved color does not change between “no effect” and “no data”, and the character effect and the like are reserved. Only “no data” for which the performance itself was not executed may be preferentially selected. Further, only one of “no effect” and “no data” may be preferentially selected.

  In S745, for each hold determination data corresponding to the effect of the revival effect, the original reserved color effect mode determined in S740 or S742 and the reserved color effect mode in the revival effect selected in S744 are compared. Then, it is determined whether or not there is at least one of the reserved color effects in the resurrection effect selected in S744 that ranks up with respect to the original reserved color effects (S745). In the determination of S745, specifically, the reserved color effect mode in the resurrection effect selected in S744 based on the above-described level relationship of white <green <red <golden is the original reserved color effect. When the rank is higher than the aspect, it is determined that the rank is to be increased. For example, when the original reserved color effect mode is “white” and the reserved color effect mode of the resurrection effect selected in S744 is “green”, it is determined that the rank is to be increased.

  When it is determined in S745 that there is at least one production target that ranks up the production mode, the production mode (message production and reserved color production) of the restoration production that performs the successful restoration production (FIG. 9L) as described above. The production mode etc.) is determined, and the data for specifying the production mode is specified as the reserved storage image (any one or more of the first to eighth reserved storage images) to be produced, and the production control micro The data is stored in the revival effect mode storage area provided in the RAM of the computer 100 (S746), and the process proceeds to S737. In accordance with the data stored in this way, a rebirth effect is executed by processing such as in-round processing. The effect mode of the reserved color effect in such a successful resurgence effect is the reserved color after the rank-up for the effect object to be ranked up, and the current reserved color for the effect object that is not ranked up.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S745 that there is no production target to rank up the production mode, the production mode (message production and holding color) of the restoration production for performing the restoration failure production as described above (FIG. 9M). For the effect control, the data for specifying the effect mode is determined, the reserved storage image (any one or more of the first to eighth reserved memory images) of the effect is specified, and the data for specifying the effect mode is specified. The restoration effect mode storage area provided in the RAM of the microcomputer 100 is stored (S743), and the process proceeds to S737. In accordance with the data stored in this way, a rebirth effect is executed by processing such as in-round processing.

  As described above, in the notice determination process, in the jackpot gaming state with a probable big hit, during the period of the first to eighth rounds, a reserved memory effect as shown in FIGS. 9 (A) to (J) is executed. In the last round of the ninth round, the process for executing the restoration effect as shown in FIGS. 9K to 9M is performed.

  In such advance notice determination processing, in each round of the big hit gaming state, the hold determination data is read by reading the hold determination data corresponding to all the production target hold storage numbers stored in the hold determination data storage area in S725. In addition to the hold memory that occurred before the transition to the big hit game state, the hold memory effect that occurred during the big hit game state is also targeted, Since the rebirth effects are executed, the scope of these effects is widened, so that the entertainment of the game can be further improved.

  As for the hold memory effect and the revival effect, only the hold memory generated before the transition to the big hit gaming state may be executed as the effect target. Further, the target for reading the hold determination data in S725 may be limited to only the hold determination data corresponding to each round.

  Further, in the notice determination process, the process of S740 preferentially selects the reserved memory whose reserved color has not changed to "white" due to "no effect" or "no data" as the effect of the revival effect. As a result, the reserved memory in which the reserved color has not changed is preferentially selected as the effect of the revival effect rather than the reserved memory in which the reserved color has been changed to “green” or “red” in S742. As a result, the reserved memory in which the reserved color has not changed is preferentially selected as the production target of the revival effect, so that the execution of the revival effect for the reserved memory in which the reserved color has already changed is limited. With respect to the reserved memory whose reserved color has changed due to the reserved memory effects in the first to eighth rounds, the execution of the revival effect prevents the effects related to the reserved color from being executed repeatedly. It is possible to prevent the player from being awakened and the fun of the game from deteriorating.

  Further, in the notice determination process, the process of S745 is limited to only the stage in which the production mode is ranked up as the production contents of the successful restoration production. Since the execution content of is limited, the on-hold storage in which the on-hold color has changed due to the on-hold storage effect in the first to eighth rounds, the on-hold effect is repeatedly executed by executing the revival effect, and Since the performance mode is prevented from being ranked down, it is possible to prevent the player from being awakened by such a performance and deteriorating the interest of the game.

  In the present embodiment, the reserved storage effect mode specified by the data stored in the effect mode storage area for the first to eighth rounds of the hold storage effect as the effect object for executing the revival effect is “effect In addition to "None" or "White" when "No data" (when white does not change), "Green" or "Red" (when color changes) is also included An example is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reserved storage effect mode specified by the data stored in the effect mode storage area for the first to eighth rounds of the stored storage effect as the effect subject to execute the revival effect is “no effect” ”Or“ white ”when“ no data ”(when white does not change). In other words, the production target for executing the revival production may be at least “white” when “no production” or “no data” (when the color does not change).

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the hold memory effect period selection process that is called and executed in S728 of the notice determination process.

  In the hold memory effect period selection process, the effect control microcomputer 100 is the remaining number of rounds (8 rounds of the first to eighth rounds) in which the hold memory effect can be performed in the big hit gaming state. The remaining number of storage effect rounds is calculated (S751). Specifically, in S751, the remaining number of reserved storage effect rounds is calculated by performing an operation of "8 rounds-round number counter value". As for the remaining number of reserved memory effect rounds, if the current round number is “1” without performing the effect as in S751, the remaining number of reserved memory effect rounds is “7” and the current round number is “2”. If so, the number of remaining storage rounds is “6”, and the correspondence between the current number of rounds and the remaining number of reserved storage effects rounds is based on the current number of rounds specified by the round number counter value. You may make it pinpoint the number of reservation memory production rounds remaining.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the remaining number of reserved storage effect rounds is “4” or more (S752). When it is determined that the remaining number of reserved storage effect rounds is “4” or more, the first effect period determination table of FIG. 33A is selected (S753), and the process proceeds to S756. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining number of reserved storage effect rounds is not “4” or more, it is determined whether or not the remaining number of stored storage effect rounds is “1” or more and “3” or less (S754). When the remaining number of reserved storage effect rounds is “1” or more and “3” or less, the second effect period determination table of FIG. 33 (B) is selected, and the process proceeds to S756. On the other hand, when the remaining number of reserved memory effect rounds is not less than “1” and not more than “3”, that is, “0”, it is the eighth round, and the last round for performing the reserved memory effect. Since only the reserved memory effect for the 1R period can be executed, the 1R period is selected as the reserved memory effect period (S754A), and the process proceeds to S758 described later.

  In S756, it is confirmed whether the hold determination data to be produced in S725 read out in S725 is a probability variation big hit, out of reach, or out of reach (S756). Then, SR2 for determining the hold storage effect period is extracted, and using the effect period determination table selected in S753 or S755, the 1R period or the 2R period is selected and determined as the effect period from the extracted value (S757).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the 1R period has been determined in S757 or S754A (S758). When it is determined that it is determined in the 1R period, the character effect effect pattern for the 1R period provided corresponding to the current round number specified by the value of the round number counter is selected as the effect of the 1R period. (S759), the process ends. Thereby, the effect pattern for 1R period using eight types of characters, such as 1st character 1R production-8th character 1R production, is selected and used for every round of the 1st-8th round.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not determined in the 1R period, that is, when it is determined in the 2R period, the character for the 2R period provided corresponding to the current round number specified by the value of the round number counter The effect pattern of the effect is selected as the effect of the 2R period (S760), and the process ends. Thereby, the effect pattern for 2R periods using the seven types of characters such as the first character 2R effect to the seventh character 2R effect is selected and used for each round of the first to seventh rounds. Then, in order to execute the hold storage effect for the 2R period, the 2R period effect flag is set (S761), and the process is terminated.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the hold storage display control process of S707.
In the on-hold storage display control process, the effect control CPU 101 sets the on-hold color change effect data set in S998 described above to determine whether or not the effect mode of the on-hold color effect needs to be changed. It is determined whether or not (S520A). When the reserved color change effect data is not set, the process proceeds to S521 described later. On the other hand, when the reserved color change effect data is set, the reserved color of the specified reserved storage image is changed to the specified reserved color based on the reserved color change effect data (S520B). Thus, for example, in the first to eighth rounds, the reserved color effect in the reserved memory effect as shown in FIGS. 9C and 9J is executed, and in the ninth round, FIGS. 9L and 9M are executed. The reserved color effect in the resurrection effect as shown in FIG.

  In this way, when the reserved color is changed by the reserved memory effect or the resurrection effect in the big hit gaming state for the reserved memory image, the control for changing the color to the normal color is not performed when the big hit gaming state is completed. With the changed color, the reserved stored image is displayed even after the big hit gaming state. It should be noted that for the reserved memory image whose color has been changed by the reserved color effect in the reserved memory effect during the big hit gaming state, the color may be returned to the normal color when the big hit gaming state ends. In addition, the on-hold storage image corresponding to the on-hold storage information on which the on-hold storage effect is performed in the big hit gaming state is erased when the big hit is caused by the variable display based on the on-hold storage information after the end of the big hit gaming state. You may do it.

  Next, the set reserved color change effect data is reset (S520C), and the process proceeds to S521. In S520B, an example is shown in which the current round number is confirmed based on the value of the round number counter. However, the current round number is confirmed using data relating to the number of rounds used for other controls. Also good.

  Next, in S521, it is determined whether or not the unprocessed number counter is “1” or more (S521). This unprocessed number counter is incremented by “1” in the command analysis process every time the first start prize designation command or the second start prize designation command is transmitted, and is subtracted by “1” in S523 described later.

  When the unprocessed number counter is not “1” or more, the process proceeds to S524 described later. On the other hand, when the unprocessed number counter is “1” or more, the pending storage display (holding stored image) in the total pending storage display unit 18c is updated and displayed (S522). 1 "is subtracted and updated, and the process proceeds to S521. As a result, the pending storage image for performing the pending storage display in the total pending storage display unit 18c is updated until the unprocessed number counter becomes “0”. The color of the reserved storage image displayed by the incremental update in S521 is a normal white color. Note that the reserved memory image of the first special symbol is different from the reserved memory image of the second special symbol by changing the type of the reserved memory image, such as the shape of the reserved memory image. And the reserved memory of the second special symbol may be displayed separately.

  On the other hand, when the unprocessed number counter is not “1” or more (when it is “0”), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the hold subtraction counter is “1” or more (S524). The hold subtraction counter is incremented by “1” in the command analysis process every time a hold storage subtraction designation command is transmitted. In other words, the hold subtraction counter receives the hold storage subtraction designation command transmitted every time the hold special data is digested and the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Counting is performed to reduce the number of displayed on-hold storage displays (hold-up stored images) in 18c.

  If the hold subtraction counter is not “1” or more, the process is terminated. On the other hand, when the hold subtraction counter is “1” or more, the CPU 101 for effect control stores the data (first hold memory data) in the area corresponding to the effect target hold memory number “1” in the hold determination data storage area. Erasing and shifting the data content of the area corresponding to the other production target hold storage number to the area corresponding to the previous production target hold storage number as described above (S525). Then, a process of updating the hold storage display in the combined hold storage display unit 18c by “1” is performed (S526). Specifically, in S526, the leftmost hold storage image 90 is deleted in the combined hold storage display unit 18c, and when there is a remaining hold storage image 90, the remaining hold storage image 90 is directed to the left end. Display control is performed to shift one by one. Then, the first hold subtraction counter is updated by subtracting “1” (S527), and the process ends. As a result, each time the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed, the on-hold storage display (the on-hold storage image) in the total on-hold storage display unit 18c is reduced and updated.

  The color of the reserved memory image of the reserved memory display displayed by such a reserved memory display control process is “white” as the normal color. As described above, “golden”, “red”, and “green” by the reserved color effect of the reserved memory effect are displayed superimposed on the “white” reserved memory image by the reserved memory display control process in the effect control process process. This is realized by displaying in such a manner. In addition, when the effect mode of the reserved color effect in the reserved memory effect is determined in the notice effect determining process, the hold determination data to be the effect object of the reserved memory effect and the data specifying the effect mode of the reserved color effect are stored. In the hold storage display control process, a hold storage effect may be performed on the hold storage table image of the corresponding hold determination data based on the stored data.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, a second embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, after executing the holding memory effect in the period of the first to eighth rounds as the first period in the jackpot gaming state, the first round of the ninth round (final round) as the second period in the jackpot gaming state The example which performs the revival effect in the period was shown. In the second embodiment, instead of 9 round probability variation jackpots, 16 rounds (16R) probability variation jackpots are provided, and the reserved memory effect is provided for a plurality of round periods of 1st to 8th rounds as the first period in the jackpot gaming state. An example in which the reserved storage effect is executed and the resurrection effect is executed in a plurality of round periods of the ninth to sixteenth rounds as the second period in the big hit gaming state will be described. In the second embodiment, portions different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the features of the jackpot type control according to the second embodiment in a table format.
The big hit type control in FIG. 52 is different from the big hit type control in FIG. 2 in that the number of executions of the big hit gaming state for the probability variable big hit is set to 16 rounds instead of 9 rounds.

  FIG. 53 is a diagram showing tabular effects (round effects) scheduled to be performed in each of the first to sixteenth rounds in the big hit gaming state according to the second embodiment.

  In the first to eighth rounds, the hold storage effect for the 1R period is executed corresponding to each of the hold storage information of the production target hold storage numbers 1 to 8 in a one-to-one correspondence relationship. With such a hold memory effect for the 1R period in the first to eighth rounds, the first hold memory effect with each of the hold memory information of effect object hold memory numbers 1 to 8 as effect objects is performed. In each of the first to eighth rounds, when there is no hold storage information having a one-to-one correspondence, the hold storage effect is not executed. And even if there is no hold storage information in a one-to-one correspondence relationship in a certain round among the first to eighth rounds, a plurality of start winnings are generated during the round, and a plurality of hold storage information Is increased, the stored storage information having a one-to-one correspondence relationship exists in the next round of the round, so that the stored storage effect is executed with the stored storage information corresponding to the next round as the production target. It will be.

  Then, in the ninth to sixteenth rounds, a hold storage effect for 1R period is further executed in correspondence with each of the hold memory information of the production target hold memory numbers 1 to 8 in a one-to-one correspondence relationship. With such a hold memory effect for the 1R period in the ninth to 16th rounds, a second hold memory effect is performed as a revival effect for each of the hold memory information of effect object hold memory numbers 1 to 8 as effect objects. It is. However, the second on-hold storage effect is executed only on the on-hold storage information in which the on-hold color effect is not changed due to the on-hold color effect.

  Note that the second on-hold storage effect as the revival effect may be executed with the on-hold storage information in which the hold color is changed by the on-hold color effect in the first on-hold storage effect. However, execution of the second hold memory effect is restricted (for example, prohibited) for the hold memory information in which the hold color is changed to “gold” that determines the jackpot by the hold color effect in the first hold memory effect. There is a need to. In addition, the reserved color ranks in a higher rank (for example, “golden”, “red”) advantageous to the player and a lower rank (for example, “green”, “white”) that is more disadvantageous for the player than the higher rank. The second hold memory effect may be executed only when the first hold memory effect is a lower rank reserved color.

  In addition, the second reserved memory effect as the revival effect is the ninth round, the tenth round, the eleventh round, and so on, regardless of the relationship between the number of rounds and the effect reserved memory number. You may make it perform the 2nd holding | maintenance memory | storage effect in order in a continuous round. By doing so, it is possible to complete the execution of the effects as soon as possible without leaving a time gap for all the effects of the second stored storage effect.

  FIG. 54 is a diagram illustrating an effect example in the effect device such as the effect display device 9 when the hold storage effect according to the second embodiment is executed. The reserved memory effect according to the second embodiment is different from the reserved memory effect shown in FIG. 9 because the revival effect as shown in FIGS. 9L to 9M is not executed in the ninth round, and FIG. ) To (K), the second reserved storage effect as the resurrection effect is sequentially executed in the ninth to sixteenth rounds. When the total pending storage number is the maximum number “8”, as shown in FIGS. 54A to 54K, eight pending storage images 90 are displayed on the total pending storage display unit 18c. In the first to eighth rounds, the first hold memory effect and the second hold memory effect are executed for each of the eight hold memory images 90.

  In the case of the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 54A to 54G, the first reserved storage effect in the first to eighth rounds is executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment. Then, in the ninth to sixteenth rounds, as shown in the representative examples in FIGS. 54 (H) to (K), the second hold storage effect as the revival effect is executed.

  As shown in FIGS. 54 (H) and (I), for example, in the tenth round, the second hold same as the second round in the first hold storage effect as shown in FIGS. 54 (D) and (E). As with the second round, the reserved storage selection image 91, the operation acceptance image 92, and the character C2 in the second reserved storage effect are displayed with the stored image as the production target. FIG. 54 (I) shows an example in which the rendering mode is ranked up from a white color to a color other than white in the second on-hold storage rendering for the second reserved memory image in the 10th round. ing.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 54 (J) and (K), for example, in the eleventh round, the same as the third round in the first hold storage effect as shown in FIGS. 54 (F) and (G). As with the third reserved memory image, the reserved memory selection image 91, the operation acceptance image 92, and the character C3 in the second reserved memory effect are displayed as in the third round. FIG. 54 (K) shows an example in which the reserved color is not ranked up from white in the second reserved memory effect for the effect of the third reserved memory image in the eleventh round.

  In the second hold storage effect sequentially executed in the ninth to sixteenth rounds according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54, for example, the first hold storage sequentially executed in the first to eighth rounds. The same effect as the first on-hold storage effect in the first to eighth rounds having a corresponding relationship, such as displaying the same character as the effect, is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the second reserved memory effect that is sequentially executed in the ninth to sixteenth rounds, a character different from the first reserved memory effect that is sequentially executed in the first to eighth rounds is displayed. For example, an effect different from the first on-hold storage effect may be performed.

  FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram showing a hold memory effect mode determination table used for selecting and determining a hold memory effect mode when executing a hold memory effect according to the second embodiment. As an effect mode determination table, a normal effect mode determination table used during the first to eighth rounds as shown in (A), and a revival effect mode determination table used during the ninth to 16th rounds as shown in (B) including. These tables are stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 100.

  The normal performance mode determination table shown in FIG. 55 (A) is used during the first to eighth rounds. The restoration effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 55 (B) is used during the first to sixteenth rounds.

  In the normal performance mode determination table, the data is set so that the relationship between the ratios for selecting the gold color is such that the probability variation big hit time> reach out of reach and non-reach out of time. In this way, when the reserved storage data to be produced is a probable big hit, the ratio of selecting the gold color as the stored storage effect mode is higher than when the reach is lost or the non-reach is lost. Therefore, when the on-hold storage effect mode becomes gold, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the big hit.

  Further, in the normal performance mode determination table, data is set so that the magnitude relationship of the ratio of selecting red is such that the probability variation big hit time> reach out of time> non-reach out of time. As described above, when the reserved storage data to be produced is a probable big hit, the ratio of selecting red as the reserved storage effect mode is higher than when the reach is lost or the non-reach is lost. In addition, when the reserved storage data to be produced is a reach that includes probability variation big hits and out of reach, the ratio of selecting red as the on-hold storage effect mode is higher than in the case of non-reach out. Therefore, when the reserved memory effect mode is red, not as much as when it is gold, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the big hit. Further, when the on-hold storage effect mode becomes red, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for reach.

  Further, in the normal performance mode determination table, data is set so that the magnitude relationship of the ratio of selecting green is as follows: when reach is lost> when probability variation is big hit> when not reach is lost. As described above, when the reserved storage data to be produced is out of reach, the ratio of selecting green as the on-hold storage production mode is higher than when the probability variation big hit or non-reach is out. In addition, when the hold storage data to be produced is a probable big hit, the ratio of selecting green as the hold storage production mode is higher than when the non-reach is lost. In addition, when the reserved storage data to be produced is a reach that includes a probable big hit and reach lag, the ratio of selecting green as the hold memory presentation mode is higher than when the non-reach lag occurs. Accordingly, when the on-hold storage effect mode is green, not as much as when it is gold or red, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the big hit. Further, when the on-hold storage effect mode is green, not as much as when it is red, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for reach.

  Further, in the normal performance mode determination table, data is set so that the magnitude relationship of the ratio of selecting no performance is such that the probability variation big hit time <reach out of time <non-reach out of time. As described above, when the reserved storage data to be produced is non-reachable, the ratio of selecting “no stored memory production” is higher than when the probability variation big hit or reach is out of reach. In addition, when the hold storage data to be produced is out of reach, the ratio of selecting “no hold storage production” is higher than when the probable big hit. When the hold storage data to be produced is a probable big hit, no hold storage production is not selected. Therefore, when the big hit gaming state is entered, if the reserved memory effect is not performed, the player understands that the expectation to the big hit and reach is lower than when the reserved memory effect is performed. Can do.

  Also, in the revival effect mode determination table of FIG. 55 (B), the selection between the probability variation big hit time, the reach deviation time, and the non-reach error time regarding the selection of the reserved storage effect mode in the normal effect mode determination table is basically performed. Although the data is set with the same magnitude relationship as the ratio relationship, the gold selection ratio increases at the probability variation big hit, and the red selection ratio increases when the reach is off, compared to the normal performance mode determination table. When the reach is lost, the red selection ratio increases and data is set in a manner.

  In this way, in the revival effect mode determination table of FIG. 55 (B), at the probability variation big hit, the ratio of selecting the gold color is higher than when the reach is out and non-reach out, and when the reach is out, the probability variation big hit and non-reach are out. The ratio of selecting red is higher than the hour, and when non-reach is off, the probability of selecting green is higher than when probable big hit and non-reach is off, and when there is no production than when probable big hit and non-reach is off Data is set so that the percentage of Further, in the revival effect mode determination table, data is set so that the ratio of selecting the gold color is higher when the probable big hit than the normal effect mode determination table of FIG.

  As a result, when the second reserved memory effect is performed in the ninth to sixteenth rounds, the gold color is more prone to the big hit than the first reserved memory effect is performed in the first to eighth rounds. Since it is easy to be selected, in the second on-hold storage effect, since the degree of coincidence between the determination content of the on-hold storage information and the effect mode becomes high when the probability is a big hit, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the revival effect. Can improve the interest of the game. Also, when the second reserved memory effect is performed in the ninth to sixteenth rounds, the notice ranks such as gold and red are higher than when the first reserved memory effect is performed in the first to eighth rounds. Since the ratio with which a high production | presentation aspect is selected becomes high, the player's expectation with respect to a revival production can be raised, and the interest of a game can be improved.

  In the revival effect mode determination table of FIG. 55 (B), data is set so that the ratio of selecting the gold color is lower when the probable big hit than the normal effect mode determination table of FIG. 55 (A). You may make it do. In this way, when the hold memory information that is the probability change big hit is included in the hold storage information that existed when the first and second hold storage effects were executed, the probability change big hit is When it occurs, the reserved memory effect can be newly executed in the big hit game state, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a modification example of the effect mode of the reserved memory image when the first and second reserved memory effects are performed according to the second embodiment. 56, (A) to (H) show the state of the hold memory image 90 on the combined hold storage display unit 18c in the effect display device 9.

  In FIG. 56, (A) shows the state of the reserved storage image 90 before the start of the first round. 56, (B) to (F) show the state of the hold memory image 90 in the first hold storage effect during the first to fourth and eighth rounds, and (G), (H) ) Shows the state of the reserved memory image 90 in the second reserved memory effect during the tenth and eleventh rounds.

  In the big hit gaming state, before the start of the first round, as shown in (A), the on-hold storage image 90 on the total on-hold storage display unit 18c is displayed in white. In the first to eighth rounds, as shown in (B) to (F), the first to eighth reserved memory images are sequentially targeted for the effect, and the first reserved memory effect is executed. . In the example shown in (B) to (F), among the first on-hold storage effects, the on-hold storage images other than the second and third on-hold storage images are changed to a hold color other than white.

  In such a state, the second and third on-hold storage images in which the on-hold color has not changed as shown in (G) and (H) are shown as the second on-hold storage effects during the first to sixteenth rounds. The second reserved memory effect is executed in the tenth and eleventh rounds as a production target.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a notice determination process according to the second embodiment.
In the notice determination processing of FIG. 57, the production control microcomputer 100 first determines whether or not the current state is a big hit gaming state with a sudden big hit (S771). When the game is in the big hit gaming state, the process ends. As a result, the hold memory effect is not executed when the game is in the big hit gaming state. On the other hand, when the game state is not a big hit game state, a renewal process for incrementing the round number counter by 1 is performed (S772).

  Next, the hold determination data is prefetched by reading the hold determination data corresponding to all the production target hold storage numbers stored in the hold determination data storage area shown in FIG. 14A (S773). Then, in the hold determination data prefetched in S773, it is determined whether or not hold determination data corresponding to the value of the round number counter is stored (S774).

  In S774, for example, when the value of the round number counter is “3”, it is determined whether data corresponding to the production target hold storage number “3” shown in FIG. 14 is stored as the hold determination data. In other words, since the production target of the hold storage effect is the hold determination data having the same production target hold storage number as the value of the number of rounds, it is determined in S774 whether or not the corresponding hold determination data is stored.

  If it is determined in S774 that the corresponding data is not stored, the process does not proceed to S775 and subsequent steps, so that the new aspect of the hold storage effect is not determined. Thereby, when the hold determination data having the same effect target hold storage number as the value of the number of rounds is not stored, the execution of the hold storage effect for the hold storage data corresponding to the number of rounds is prohibited. Thereby, when the number of reserved memories is less than the number of rights to be subjected to the reserved memory effect, the execution of the reserved memory effect is restricted, so that the player's attention can be attracted to the reserved memory display. Therefore, the interest of the game can be further improved. On the other hand, when it is determined in S774 that the corresponding data is stored, it is determined whether the current round corresponds to one of the first to eighth rounds based on the value of the round number counter. (S775).

  When it is determined in S775 that it corresponds to one of the first to eighth rounds, S776 to S780 are executed as processing for executing the first hold storage effect as described above. On the other hand, when it is determined in S775 that it does not correspond to any of the first to eighth rounds, that is, when it corresponds to any of the ninth to sixteenth rounds, the second reserved storage effect as described above. S781 to S786 are executed as processing for executing.

  When it corresponds to any of the first to eighth rounds, the normal performance mode determination table of FIG. 55 (A) is selected (S776), and the hold determination data of the production target is the probability variation big hit, the sudden big hit, the reach is off, It is confirmed whether the non-reach is off (S777). Then, it is determined whether or not the hold determination data to be produced is a big hit (S778). When the hold determination data to be produced is not a sudden big hit, SR3 for determining the hold storage production effect is extracted, and using the normal effect mode determination table selected in S776, the effect mode (golden, Any one of red, green, and no production is determined (S779), and the process proceeds to S780.

  On the other hand, when the hold determination data to be produced is a big hit, the process proceeds to S780 without determining the production mode of the reserved color production in S779. As a result, when the hold determination data to be produced is an abrupt big hit, the effect mode of the hold memory effect is not determined, and the effect mode of the hold memory effect is “no data”. Therefore, the white color that is the normal color when the reserved memory effect is not performed is maintained for the reserved memory image to be effected. In other words, if the hold determination data to be produced is data that is a big hit that is unfavorable to the player in the opening mode of the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 (that is, the game) and is more likely to be a big hit than the probability change big hit, the hold color in the hold storage effect Since the execution of the effect is prohibited, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating by executing the reserved memory effect that suggests that it will be a big hit. In addition, when the hold determination data to be produced is data that is a big hit, instead of completely prohibiting the execution of the hold color effect, the rate at which the hold memory effect is executed becomes more than the other display results. You may control so that it may decrease. That is, if the hold determination data to be produced is data that is a big hit, any control may be performed as long as it is a control that restricts execution of the hold storage effect.

  In addition, when determining the effect mode of the reserved color effect in S779, the determination ratio of the effect mode may be different between the hold determination data of the first special symbol and the hold determination data of the second special symbol. For example, if a plurality of types of effect mode determination tables having different effect mode determination ratios are provided, the effect mode determination table to be selected differs between the first special symbol hold determination data and the second special symbol hold determination data. Good. In addition, for example, when a big hit with a different number of rounds such as a 9 round big hit and a 12 round big hit is selected as the big hit type as a big hit other than the sudden big hit, for which a winning ball is substantially obtained. Depending on the maximum number of rounds, the determination ratio of the production mode may be different. For example, it is only necessary to provide a plurality of types of effect mode determination tables having different effect mode determination ratios, and to select different effect mode determination tables for the 9th round jackpot and the 12th round jackpot.

  In S780, in addition to the data specifying the effect period selected in S774A and the data specifying the effect mode of the character effect, the data specifying the effect mode such as the data specifying the effect mode of the reserved color effect determined in S779 Is specified and stored in the effect mode storage area provided in the RAM of the effect control microcomputer 100 (S780). Thereby, in the effect mode storage area, data specifying the hold storage effect mode is sequentially stored corresponding to each of the first to eighth effect target hold storage numbers. The first on-hold storage effect is executed by processing such as in-round processing according to the data stored in this way.

  Note that the data for specifying the hold memory effect mode may be stored in the RAM in a mode for specifying the hold memory image by associating it with the hold determination data in the hold determination data storage area shown in FIG. . If it does in this way, in the production | presentation mode storage area, the hold memory production mode (including no production | presentation) determined about each holding | maintenance determination data in order from the holding | maintenance determination data corresponding to production | generation object hold | maintenance storage number 1 is specified. The data to be stored will be stored.

  Further, when the process proceeds from S774 to S787 without going through S779, data for specifying the effect mode of the reserved color effect is not stored, so the reserved storage effect mode corresponding to the corresponding effect target storage memory number in the effect mode storage area. Among the data for specifying “No reserved color data”, there is no data for specifying the reserved color rendering mode determined in S779. Further, when the process proceeds from S774 to S787, since S779 is not executed, data corresponding to the stored storage image corresponding to the round is not stored in the effect mode storage area. There will be no data specifying the on-hold storage effect mode corresponding to the effect target hold memory number.

  Further, when it is determined by S775 described above that it does not correspond to any of the first to eighth rounds, that is, when it corresponds to any of the eighth to sixteenth rounds, it is stored in the effect mode storage area by S780. It is determined whether or not “no effect” or “no data” is included as the reserved storage effect mode specified by the data (S781). Here, “no data” includes the case where the hold determination data corresponding to the round number counter is not stored in S774 in addition to the case where the hold storage effect mode is not determined in S779 described above.

  If it is determined in S781 that there is no “no effect” or “no data”, the process proceeds to S787 described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in S781 that there is “no effect” or “no data”, the restoration effect mode determination table of FIG. 55B is selected (S782), and the hold determination data to be effected is the probability variation big hit. In step S783, it is confirmed whether the hit is a big hit, reach is out, or non-reach is out. Then, it is determined whether or not the hold determination data to be produced is a big hit (S784). When the hold determination data to be produced is not a big hit, SR3 for determining the hold memory effect mode is extracted, and using the revival effect mode determination table selected in S782, the effect mode (golden, Any one of red, green and no production is determined (S785), and the process proceeds to S786.

  On the other hand, when the hold determination data for the production target is a big hit, the process proceeds to S786 without determining the production mode of the reserved color production in S785. As a result, when the hold determination data to be produced is an abrupt big hit, the effect mode of the hold memory effect is not determined, and the effect mode of the hold memory effect is “no data”. Therefore, the white color that is the normal color when the reserved memory effect is not performed is maintained for the reserved memory image to be effected.

  In S786, in addition to the data specifying the effect period selected in S774A and the data specifying the effect mode of the character effect, the data specifying the effect mode such as the data specifying the effect mode of the reserved color effect determined in S785. Is stored in an effect mode storage area provided in the RAM of the effect control microcomputer 100 (S786). Then, the process proceeds to S787. Thereby, in the effect mode storage area, data for specifying the effect mode of the second on-hold storage effect is stored in order. In accordance with the data stored in this way, the second hold storage effect is executed by processing such as in-round processing.

  Next, in S787, it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter is the upper limit “16”, that is, whether or not it is the 16th round (S787). If it is determined that the value of the round number counter is not “16”, the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the round number counter is “16”, the value of the round number counter is reset to “0” (S788), and the process ends.

  As described above, in the notice determination process according to the second embodiment, the first to eighth round periods are the first as shown in FIGS. 54 (A) to (G) in the jackpot gaming state with a probable big hit. Processing for executing the second hold storage effect is performed, and during the period of the ninth to sixteenth rounds, the second hold storage effect as shown in FIGS. 54 (H) to (K) is executed. Processing is performed.

Next, main effects obtained by the embodiment described above will be described.
(1) As shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 54, and FIG. 34, FIG. 35 and FIG. 55, the display mode of the hold memory display corresponding to each hold memory is changed when shifting to the big hit gaming state. By performing a hold memory effect that suggests the possibility that the display result of the variable display based on each hold memory becomes a specific display result for each hold memory, the hold memory effect is intended for which hold memory This makes it easier to understand whether or not the game is interesting. Further, after the reserved memory effect is executed in the first period such as the first to eighth rounds, at least of the reserved memories in the second period such as the ninth round or the ninth to sixteenth rounds. Since the hold memory effect as the resurrection effect is executed again for the hold memory information whose display mode has not changed in the hold memory effect in the first period, for the hold memory whose display mode has not changed in the first period However, since the player can have a sense of expectation, the interest of the game can be further improved.

  (2) As shown in S740 and S742 in FIG. 49, the 9th to 16th hold storage information whose display mode of the hold storage image did not change due to the first hold storage effect in the 1st to 8th rounds. In the round, since the second hold memory effect as the revival effect is executed again in preference to the hold memory in which the display mode of the hold memory image has changed, the display mode is changed by the hold memory effect only for a part of the hold memories. It can be prevented from changing.

  (3) Since S725 of FIG. 49 and S773 of FIG. 57 pre-read the hold determination data for each round and execute the hold memory effect, in addition to the hold memory stored before shifting to the big hit gaming state, Since the hold memory effect is executed with the hold memory stored in the big hit game state as the target, the target range of the hold memory effect is expanded, so that the interest of the game can be further improved.

  (4) For example, as shown in FIGS. 9B to 9G, each of the on-hold storage effects is a plurality of effect execution timings such as the first to eighth rounds when the game state shifts to the big hit gaming state. In, for example, a predetermined number of rights such as one at the execution timing of one round are executed. On the other hand, as shown in S727 of FIG. 49, when there is no hold determination data corresponding to the round number counter value, the notice determination process is ended and the hold storage effect is not executed. As a result, when the number of rights that are reserved and stored is less than the number of rights that are subject to the reserved memory effect at each effect execution timing, the execution of the reserved memory effect is limited. It becomes easy to understand the relationship between the stored image and the hold memory image, and further, the interest of the game can be further improved by not decreasing the execution frequency of the hold memory effect.

  (5) As shown in S740 and S745 in FIG. 49 and S781 in FIG. 57, the execution of the resurrection effect is restricted for the hold memory in which the effect mode of the hold memory image is changed in the hold memory effect in the first to eighth rounds. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reserved storage effect from being executed in duplicate, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being awakened by such an effect and the interest of the game from being lowered.

  (6) As shown in S1904A of FIG. 9, FIG. 54, FIG. 46, the player's participation in the game by executing the hold memory effect when the operation button 130 is operated before the operation valid period elapses. The motivation can be improved and the interest of the game can be improved.

  (7) As shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 34 and FIG. 35, the display result of the variable display based on each right stored on a hold basis is displayed for each right when shifting to the big hit gaming state. Since the reserved memory effect suggested by the color of the reserved memory display is performed, the player can recognize which right can be expected. Thereby, a player's sense of expectation when it becomes a big hit gaming state can be heightened, and the interest of the game when it becomes a big hit gaming state can be improved. Furthermore, the execution timing of the hold storage effect differs depending on whether the effect is performed in the 1R period as shown in FIGS. 9B and 9C or in the 2R period as shown in FIGS. 9H to 9J. . For example, the period for executing the reserved memory effect is different, and the timing for executing the character effect and the timing for executing the reserved color effect in the reserved memory effect are different. And, as shown in FIG. 33, when the total reserved memory number is 4 or more, the ratio of the production of the 2R period is higher than when the total reserved memory number is 3 or less. Accordingly, the execution timing of the hold memory effect changes for each hold memory. As a result, since the control for changing the timing of performing the stored storage effect for each right is performed according to the number of rights stored and retained, it is possible to prevent the production timing at which the stored storage effect is executed from being biased. Can do.

  (8) The execution timing of the hold storage effect depends on whether the effect is performed in the 1R period as shown in FIGS. 9B and 9C or in the 2R period as shown in FIGS. 9H to 9J. Different. As shown in FIG. 33, when the stored data shows a probable big hit, the 2R period effect is selected when the stored data shows a loss of reach and when the stored data shows a non-reach error. Since the ratio of being played increases, the timing of performing the suggestive effect changes for each right according to the jackpot determination result. As a result, since the control for changing the timing for executing the hold memory effect is performed in accordance with the determination result regarding the rights stored and reserved, the player's expectation changes depending on the effect timing at which the hold memory effect is executed. Therefore, the interest of the game can be further improved.

  (9) As shown in FIGS. 34 (A) and 34 (B) and FIGS. 35 (A) and 35 (B), when the hold determination data that is a big hit is included in the hold determination data that is not the production target, Compared to the case where the hold determination data that is a big hit is not included, for example, the ratio of execution of the effect mode of the hold storage effect having a higher notice rank, such as the effect mode of making the hold memory image 90 golden, is higher. In addition, there is a high ratio of selecting the effect mode of the reserved memory effect that makes the reserved memory image 90 golden, red, or green. Accordingly, whether or not the determination result regarding the right that is reserved and stored includes the right that the display result of the variable display becomes the jackpot display result in the right other than the right that is the target of the storage and storage effect. Accordingly, at least one of the effect mode and the execution probability for the reserved storage effect is made different, so that the display result of the variable display is a jackpot display based on the fact that at least one of the effect mode and the execution probability is different. It can be emphasized more that the resulting rights are included.

  (10) For example, as shown in FIGS. 9 (B) to (G), when the reserved storage effect shifts to the big hit gaming state, each of a plurality of effect execution timings such as the first to eighth rounds is performed. It is executed for a predetermined number of rights, such as one, at a single performance execution timing. On the other hand, for example, as shown in FIGS. 9H to 9J, the timing for executing the hold memory effect can be changed by performing the hold memory effect for one hold memory at the execution timing of two rounds. . Thereby, the interest of the game can be further improved by the change in the relationship between the reserved memory effect and the number of rights to be effected.

  (11) As shown in FIGS. 33A and 33B, when the probability variation is a big hit, one holding storage is performed at the execution timing of the effect of the 1R period so that the ratio of selecting the execution of the effect of the 2R period is high. The rate at which the display result of the variable display becomes the jackpot display result differs between when the reserved memory effect is performed for the target and when the reserved memory effect is performed for one reserved memory at the execution timing of the effect in the 2R period. Thereby, since the reliability with respect to the jackpot display result in the hold memory effect changes due to the change in the relationship between the hold memory effect and the number of rights to be effected, the interest of the game can be further improved.

  (12) As shown in S732A of FIG. 49, when the right to be a big hit is stored in the hold determination data, the hold memory effect is not executed by not determining the effect mode of the hold memory effect, Since the open state of the special variable winning ball device 20 (that is, the exit) is limited to the execution of the holding memory effect in which the holding color is changed with respect to the sudden hit big hit which is unfavorable to the player, the big hit gaming state for the player. To prevent the player's interest from deteriorating due to the execution of a hold memory effect in which the hold color changes for a sudden big hit that is more disadvantageous than the odd big hit. Can do.

Next, modifications, feature points, and the like of the embodiment described above are listed below.
(1) In the embodiment described above, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, which are two special symbol displays, are provided, and the two special symbols are variably displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which one special symbol display is provided instead of two special symbol displays, and one special symbol is variably displayed. In the case of adopting such a configuration, the special symbol change display on the special symbol display is executed in accordance with each of the winning at the first starting winning port 13 and the winning at the second starting winning port 14. You can do so. In other words, various controls for causing the first special symbol display 8a to execute the first special symbol based on the winning of the first start winning port 13 and the second special symbol display based on the winning of the second starting winning port 14. The various controls for causing the second special symbol to be executed by the device 8b may be applied to the variation display of the special symbol in one special symbol display.

  (2) In the above-described embodiment, the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. May be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted, and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27R, 27L, etc.) are mounted. Alternatively, two substrates, the second effect control substrate, may be provided.

  (3) In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100. However, the game control microcomputer 560 is connected to another board (for example, FIG. (Sound / lamp board having a function of a circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and a function mounted on the lamp driver board 35 and a function of a circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). An effect control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board are equipped with control means such as a microcomputer, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to voice control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 9. You may make it transmit to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the display control in accordance with the effect control command received directly from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above-described embodiment. Display control can be performed in response to commands received from the board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  (4) The reserved memory effect executed in the big hit gaming state is executed only during the big hit gaming state round, both during the big hit gaming state round and ending, or only during the big hit gaming state ending. May be. In addition, the timing for executing such a hold memory effect is, for example, other timing such as that executed between rounds, or after the end of the big hit gaming state and before the first variable display is started. It may be executed at a specific timing from the start of the specific game state to the end of the specific game state and the start of the first variation display.

  (5) The control related to the on-hold storage effect may be performed on the game control microcomputer 560 side or on the effect control microcomputer 100 side.

  (6) The above-described embodiment is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls in response to detection of winning balls, but responds to detection of winning balls by enclosing gaming balls. It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that gives points.

  (7) The above-described embodiment can also be applied to an apparatus such as a game machine that simulates the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The program and data for realizing the above-described embodiment are not limited to a form distributed and provided to a computer apparatus or the like by a detachable recording medium, but a storage apparatus that the computer apparatus or the like has in advance. You may take the form that is distributed by pre-installing. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter. The game embodiment can be executed not only by executing a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  (8) In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the hold storage effect is executed in accordance with the generation order from the hold determination data that has occurred first is shown for the hold determination data as the hold storage effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and based on the pre-read hold determination data, it is determined whether or not there is hold determination data that is a big hit in the hold storage, and the hold storage effect is traced back to the last hold determination data. You may make it perform control which performs.

  (9) The reserved memory effect as shown in the above-described embodiment is a gaming machine that performs control to display the special symbols in a variable manner with priority given to the second reserved memory among the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory. You may make it perform in. In that case, during the big hit gaming state, the reserved memory effect may be performed only for the second special symbol executed corresponding to the second reserved memory. Also, in the high base state and the big hit game state, the game control microcomputer 560 should not transmit a winning determination result designation command for the first special symbol (first hold memory). Also good. Further, during the high base state and the big hit gaming state, the on-hold storage effect for the first special symbol (first on-hold storage) may not be executed on the side of the effect control microcomputer 100.

  (10) The reserved storage effects shown in the above-described embodiment include the first period (the period of the first to eighth rounds), the second period (in the case of the second embodiment, the period of the ninth round, In the case of the second embodiment, even when the color changes to the same reserved color in the 9th to 16th rounds), the color changes to the reserved color in the first period when the color changes to the reserved color in the second period. The production control microcomputer 100 may perform control such that the expected degree of probability variation big hit is higher than when the change has occurred. For example, when it is a probable big hit, the production mode may be determined so that the ratio of change in the reserved color is higher in the second period than in the first period.

  (11) In the on-hold storage effect shown in the above-described embodiment, as an example of executing the on-hold color effect in response to the operation of the operation button 130, the following effect may be used. For example, in the effect display device 9, an image with fishing as a motif is displayed based on the operation button 130 being operated during a predetermined operation effective period, and each holding image is used as an effect object during the fishing effect. Predetermined operation conditions such as the operation button 130 being operated at a specific timing with good timing during the predetermined operation valid period or the operation button 130 being operated (repeated) until the predetermined number of consecutive hits is satisfied are satisfied. The effect that the fish is picked up may be executed to change the color of the fish (normal color is white, for example) as the reserved color described above.

  (12) In the on-hold storage effect shown in the above-described embodiment, the following effect may be used as an example of executing the on-hold color effect in response to the operation of the operation button 130. For example, in the effect display device 9, based on the operation button 130 being operated during a predetermined operation effective period, a battle effect in which a teammate character who is on the player side and an enemy character that is hostile to the teammate character are battled. The operation button 130 is operated at a specific timing with good timing during the predetermined operation effective period during the battle production, or the operation button 130 is operated (repeated) until the predetermined number of repeated hits is reached. When a predetermined operation condition such as the above is satisfied, the teammate character executes an effect of winning against the enemy character and changes the color of the teammate character (normal color is white, for example) as the reserved color described above. You may make it perform the effect to make.

  (13) As a target for prefetching the hold determination data used to execute the hold memory effect shown in the above-described embodiment, a period during which the hold memory effect including the big hit game state based on the big hit variation display can be executed You may use all the pending | holding storage information which generate | occur | produced until elapse. Further, the pending storage information generated from the occurrence of the jackpot storage information that becomes a big hit until the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state based on the pending storage information may be used.

  (14) About each of the 1R period hold storage effect mode determination table of FIGS. 35 (A) and (B) described above and the 2R period hold storage effect mode determination table of FIGS. 36 (A) and (B) described above. Based on the data that can specify whether the display result obtained by pre-reading the hold determination data is a probable big hit, the reach is out, or the non-reach is out, gold, red, green, and no effect (normal color: An example in which the selection ratio of (white) was different was shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in addition to the data that can specify whether the probability big hit, reach losing, or non-reach losing will be specified, the reserved storage effect before the reserved storage information to be determined using the table Depending on whether or not the hold storage effect has been executed for the hold storage information that is the subject of the production (whether or not the operation button 130 has been operated during the effective period), gold, red, green, and no effect Data may be set so that the selection ratio of (normal color: white) is different. For example, when the hold effect is executed for the hold memory information that is the effect target of the hold memory effect before the hold memory information that is the target of the current performance, the rank is higher than when the hold effect is not executed. The data may be set so that the ratio of determining a high performance aspect is high. In addition, for these tables, whether or not the hold color has changed in the hold memory effect for the hold memory information that is the subject of the hold memory effect before the hold memory information to be determined using the table. Depending on the data, the data may be set so that the selection ratio of the reserved color is different.

  (15) With respect to the normal performance mode determination table in FIG. 55A described above, data that can specify whether the display result obtained by prefetching the hold determination data is a probable big hit, the reach is out, or the non-reach is out. Based on, an example is shown in which the selection ratios of gold, red, green, and no effect (normal color: white) are different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in addition to the data that can specify whether the probability big hit, reach losing, or non-reach losing will be specified, the reserved storage effect before the reserved storage information to be determined using the table Depending on whether or not the hold storage effect has been executed for the hold storage information that is the subject of the production (whether or not the operation button 130 has been operated during the effective period), gold, red, green, and no effect Data may be set so that the selection ratio of (normal color: white) is different. For example, when the hold effect is executed for the hold memory information that is the effect target of the hold memory effect before the hold memory information that is the target of the current performance, the rank is higher than when the hold effect is not executed. The data may be set so that the ratio of determining a high performance aspect is high. About this table, depending on whether or not the hold color has changed in the hold storage effect, with respect to the hold memory information that is the effect target of the hold storage effect before the hold storage information to be determined using the table Alternatively, the data may be set so that the selection ratio of the reserved color is different. Further, in the restoration effect mode determination table of FIG. 55 (B) described above, the display result obtained by prefetching the hold determination data is data that can specify whether it is a probable big hit, the reach is out, or the non-reach is out. Based on this, an example is shown in which the selection ratios of gold, red, green, and no effect (normal color: white) are different. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In addition to the data that can specify whether the probability big hit, the reach out of reach, or the non-reach out of place is specified, the on-hold storage effect on the first on-hold storage effect on the on-hold storage information to be produced Even if it is executed (whether the operation button 130 is operated during the effective period), the data is selected so that the selection ratios of gold, red, green, and no effect (normal color: white) are different. It may be set. For example, as the first hold storage effect, even when the hold effect is executed, the data may be set so that the ratio in which the effect mode having a higher rank is determined is higher than when the hold effect is not executed. Good. In addition, regarding this table, data is stored so that the selection ratio of the reserved color differs with respect to the reserved storage information to be produced, depending on whether or not the reserved color has changed in the reserved storage effect for the first reserved storage effect. It may be set.

  (16) It should be understood that the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  9 effect display device, 8a first special symbol display, 8b second special symbol display, 1 pachinko gaming machine, 55 RAM, 560 game control microcomputer, 18c total hold memory display unit, 100 effect control microcomputer, 20 Special variable winning ball device.

Claims (1)

A variable display means for performing variable display of a plurality of types of identification information, each of which can be identified in accordance with the establishment of the start condition, and a specific display result in which the display result of the identification information derived to the variable display means is predetermined A gaming machine that shifts to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when
Hold storage means for storing data extracted when the start condition is satisfied as hold storage;
A pre-determining means for determining whether or not a display result is the specific display result when starting a variable display based on the holding storage;
Whether the display result of the variable display based on the one hold memory becomes the specific display result until the specific condition for starting the variable display based on the one hold memory stored in the hold storage means is satisfied. Holding memory determining means for determining whether or not
A hold display means for displaying a hold memory corresponding to each hold memory in a manner in which the number of the hold memories stored in the hold storage means can be visually recognized;
Based on the determination result of the hold memory determining means, the display result of the variable display based on each hold memory stored in the hold memory means is obtained by changing the display mode of the hold memory display corresponding to each hold memory. A suggestion effect means for performing a suggestion effect that suggests the possibility of becoming the specific display result for each reserved memory,
The suggestion producing means is
A first suggestion effect executing means for executing the suggestion effect on the hold storage stored in the hold storage means based on a determination result of the hold memory determination means in a first period;
In the second period after the lapse of the first period, among the on-hold storages stored in the on-hold storage unit, the display mode of the on-hold storage display is changed by at least the suggestion effect by the first suggestion effect executing unit. A gaming machine comprising: second suggestion effect executing means for executing the suggestion effect again based on a determination result of the hold memory determination means for the reserved memory that has not been stored.

Images